JP2011240108A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can attain diversification of performance.SOLUTION: When winning to a start prize opening 84a is established when a performance pattern is variably displayed, the winning is stored as a retention ball number, and when the retention ball number is stored at the end of the variable display of the performance pattern, a jackpot lottery is performed by comparing a value of a jackpot random number counter C1 which is obtained in this winning with a jackpot value, and a jackpot is generated based on the result of the jackpot lottery. When winning to the start prize opening 84a is established, a look-ahead performance lottery is performed by comparing a value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is obtained in this winning with the jackpot value, and a performance for announcing occurrence of jackpot is performed based on the result of the look-ahead performance lottery. The processing of steps S308-S314 is executed as timer interruption processing, and the look-ahead processing is executed as main processing which is interrupted during execution of the timer interruption processing.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, when a game ball wins at the start winning opening, the display of the effect symbol is started on the symbol display device and the jackpot lottery is performed. When it is determined that the jackpot is to be generated based on the jackpot, it is known that the jackpot is generated after the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol (for example, “777”).

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 prefetches the result of the big hit lottery and performs the prefetch effect during the change of the effect symbol. The pre-reading effect means that if a game ball wins the starting winning opening during the change of the production symbol, the number of reserved balls is added, and a lottery lottery is performed based on the random number value acquired at the winning timing. Based on the result, it is an effect of notifying about the gaming state that occurs when the variation display of the effect symbol performed by digestion of the reserved ball is completed.
For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first reserved ball is a jackpot, a notice is given that a jackpot will be generated when the next variation display after the current variation display is completed.

JP 2009-291480 A

However, as in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, if the effects are diversified such as performing a pre-reading effect during the change of the effect symbol, the processing load increases, which may cause a problem.

Therefore, the present invention has been made paying attention to the unsolved problems of the conventional techniques as exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing diversification of effects. It is said.

[Invention 1] In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine of Invention 1 comprises:
When a special prize determination for generating a special prize state is made triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and the special prize state is determined to be generated based on the result of the special prize determination. A game machine that displays the identification information in a stopped state and generates the special prize state,
Change display means for changing and displaying the identification information on the display means;
If the predetermined condition is established when the change display means is displaying the change, the condition establishment storage means for storing the establishment of the predetermined condition;
A first special prize determining means for performing the special prize determination when the change establishment means stores the establishment of the predetermined condition when the change display is completed;
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, a second special prize determining means for performing the special prize determination;
A special prize state generating means for generating the special prize state based on a determination result of the first special prize determination means;
Based on the determination result of the second special prize determining means, and a notice effect means for performing an effect of giving a notice about the gaming state that occurs when the change display subsequent to the current change display of the identification information is completed,
The process constituting part or all of the second special prize determining means and the notice effect producing means is executed as an interrupted process that is interrupted during execution of the predetermined period process executed at a predetermined period.

With such a configuration, a special prize is determined when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means by the change display means. If the predetermined condition is established when the change display means displays the change, the establishment of the predetermined condition is stored by the condition establishment storage means. After that, when the change display is completed by the change display means, since the establishment of the predetermined condition is stored in the condition establishment storage means, the special prize determination is performed by the first special prize determination means. Then, a special prize state is generated by the special prize state generation means based on the determination result of the first special prize determination means.

In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special prize determination is performed by the second special prize determination means.
Then, the notice effect means gives an effect of giving a notice about the gaming state that occurs when the change display subsequent to the current change display of the identification information is completed based on the determination result of the second special prize determination means.

In such a configuration, when the change display is completed by the change display means, the condition establishment storage means stores the establishment of the predetermined condition, and if the predetermined condition is established, the processing load increases. End up. Here, considering the case where all the processes constituting the second special prize determination unit and the notice effect unit are executed as the predetermined period process, the processing load of the predetermined period process increases, which may cause a problem. On the other hand, in the present invention, the processing constituting part or all of the second special prize determining means and the notice effect means is executed as the interrupted process, so that the processing load of the predetermined periodic process can be reduced.

[Invention 2] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention 2 is
The special prize determination for generating the special prize state is triggered by winning the first prize opening or the second prize opening, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and the special prize state is generated based on the result of the special prize judgment If it is determined to be a gaming machine that stops displaying the identification information with a predetermined content and generates the special prize state,
Change display means for changing and displaying the identification information on the display means;
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number when there is a winning in the first winning opening;
A second random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number when there is a winning in the first winning opening;
If there is a winning in the first winning opening when the change display means is changed and displayed,
First prize storage means for storing the prize;
When the change display is completed by the change display means and the first prize storage means stores a prize, the random number value obtained at the time of the prize winning by the first random number obtaining means and a predetermined value are obtained. First special prize determination means for performing the special prize determination by comparing;
Second prize determination for performing the prize determination by comparing the predetermined value with the value of the random number acquired at the time of the winning by the second random number acquisition means when there is a winning in the first winning opening Means,
A third random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number when there is a winning in the second winning opening;
A fourth random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number when there is a winning in the second winning opening;
When there is a winning in the second winning opening when the change display means is displaying the change,
Second prize storage means for storing the prize;
When the second display storage means stores a prize when the change display is finished by the change display means, the random number value acquired at the time of the winning by the third random number acquisition means and a predetermined value are obtained. Third special prize determination means for performing the special prize determination by comparing;
When there is a prize winning in the second prize opening, a fourth special prize determination for performing the special prize determination by comparing the predetermined random value with the random number value acquired at the time of the winning by the fourth random number acquisition means Means,
A special prize state generating means for generating the special prize state based on a determination result of the first special prize determination means or the third special prize determination means;
Based on the determination result of the second special prize determination means or the fourth special prize determination means, a notice for performing an effect for giving a notice about the gaming state that occurs when the subsequent change display after the current change display of the identification information ends. Directing means,
The processes constituting part or all of the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, and the notice effect means are predetermined cycles that are executed in a predetermined cycle. It is characterized by being executed as an interrupted process that is interrupted during execution of the periodic process.

If it is such composition, special prize judgment will be performed triggered by winning to the 1st prize opening or the 2nd prize opening, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means by a change display means. If there is a change in the change display means and there is a winning in the first winning opening, the first random number acquisition means
A random number is acquired, and the first prize storage means stores the prize. After that, when the change display is completed by the change display means, the winning is stored in the first prize storage means, so that the random number value acquired at the time of winning by the first special prize determination means and a predetermined value The special award is determined by comparing. Similarly, when the change display means displays a change and there is a winning in the second winning opening, a random number is acquired by the third random number acquiring means, and the winning is stored by the second winning storage means. Is done. After that, when the change display is finished by the change display means,
Since the winning is stored in the winning storage means, the special prize determination is performed by the third special prize determining means by comparing the value of the random number acquired at the time of winning with a predetermined value. Then, the special prize state generation means generates a special prize state based on the determination result of the first special prize determination means or the third special prize determination means.

In addition, when there is a winning in the first winning opening, a random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, and a random number value acquired at the time of winning by the second special prize determination means and a predetermined value are obtained. The special prize is determined by the comparison. Similarly, when there is a winning in the second winning opening, a random number is acquired by the fourth random number acquiring means, and the random number value acquired at the winning by the fourth special prize determining means, and a predetermined value, The special award is determined by comparing. Then, the advance notice means gives a notice about the gaming state that occurs when the change display subsequent to the current change display of the identification information ends based on the determination result of the second special prize determination means or the fourth special prize determination means. Production is performed.

In such a configuration, when the change display is completed by the change display means, if the winning is stored in the first winning storage means, and if there is a winning in the first winning opening, the processing load increases. Resulting in. Similarly, when the change display means finishes the change display, if the winning is stored in the second winning storage means, and if there is a winning in the second winning opening, the processing load increases. . Furthermore, if they overlap, the processing load further increases. Here, in consideration of a case where all the processes constituting the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means and the notice effect means are executed as the predetermined period processing, the predetermined period There is a possibility that the processing load of processing increases and a defect occurs. On the other hand, in the present invention, the second
Processing that constitutes part or all of the random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, and the notice effect production means is executed as an interrupted process, so the processing load of the predetermined cycle process Can be reduced.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the processing constituting part or all of the second special prize determining means and the notice effect means is executed as the interrupted process, so the processing load of the predetermined periodic process is reduced. Can be reduced. Therefore, the effect that diversification of production can be realized as compared with the conventional case.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine of the invention 2, the processing constituting part or all of the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, and the notice effect means is interrupted. Since it is executed as a process, the processing load of the predetermined cycle process can be reduced. Therefore, the effect that diversification of production can be realized as compared with the conventional case.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is unfolded with the main body frame 13 and the front door frame 14 spread apart. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is unfolded with the main body frame 13 and the back pack unit 15 spread apart. 3 is a front view of the back pack unit 15. FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 81. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a control system 300. FIG. It is drawing for demonstrating the display screen of the production symbol display apparatus 91. FIG. It is a figure showing a jackpot type. It is a figure which shows the buffer for counters of a RAM (Random Access Memory) 314, and a storage area for storage balls. It is a figure which shows the classification of a command. It is a figure which shows a part of data structure of the distribution structure table 404. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a data structure of a fluctuation pattern table 406. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing NMI (Non Maskable Interrupt) interrupt processing executed by main controller 162. 4 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by main controller 162. 3 is a flowchart showing a start winning process 1 executed by a main controller 162. 4 is a flowchart showing a start winning process 2 executed by the main controller 162. 4 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by main controller 162. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by main controller 162. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol control process performed with the main controller 162. 3 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process 1 executed by a main controller 162. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process 1 performed with the main controller 162. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process 2 performed with the main controller 162. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 143. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed with the audio lamp control apparatus 143. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed with the audio lamp control apparatus 143. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a display control device 302. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a data structure of a variation pattern command management table 408. FIG. FIG. 11 shows a data structure of an effect data table 410. It is a figure which shows the data structure of the stop symbol management table. It is a figure which shows the data structure of the stop symbol table 414. It is a figure showing operation of image controller 376. It is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed with the display control apparatus 302. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed with the display control apparatus 302. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the display control apparatus 302. 10 is a flowchart showing prefetch command processing executed by the display control apparatus 302. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command process performed with the display control apparatus 302. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the display control apparatus 302. 10 is a flowchart showing a confirmation command process executed by the display control apparatus 302. 10 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the display control apparatus 302. 4 is a diagram illustrating a data structure of drawing data 418. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing display execution processing executed by the display control device 302. 4 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by the display control device 302. It is a figure which shows the reservation ball | bowl symbol and the predetermined notice symbol which are displayed on the lower left of the main display area Dm. 4 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by main controller 162. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by main controller 162. 3 is a flowchart showing a start winning process 1 executed by a main controller 162. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process 1 performed with the main controller 162. 3 is a flowchart showing a start winning process 1 executed by a main controller 162. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by main controller 162. 3 is a flowchart showing a start winning process 1 executed by a main controller 162. 3 is a flowchart showing a start winning process 1 executed by a main controller 162. 10 is a flowchart showing prefetch command processing executed by the display control apparatus 302. 10 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the display control apparatus 302.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 to 43 are diagrams showing a first embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine.
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is unfolded with the main body frame 13 and the front door frame 14 spread apart. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is unfolded with the main body frame 13 and the back pack unit 15 spread apart.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main part 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. It is comprised. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 attaches and fixes the outer frame 11 to the island facility,
It will be installed in the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 1, a ball lending device (for example, CR unit) Y is provided on the side of the outer frame 11. A card insertion slot H is provided on the front side of the ball lending device Y so that a number of game balls corresponding to the amount stored in the card can be lent by inserting the card into the card insertion slot H. It has become.

2 and 3, the gaming machine main part 12 includes a main body frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the main body frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the main body frame 13. And is configured. The main body frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, in the front view, the left side is the rotation axis side and the right side is the rotation turning side.
Can be rotated forward.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation shaft side and the right side as a rotation swivel side in a front view. Has been. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 13, and in the front view, the left side is the rotation axis side and the right side is the rotation rotation side, and the rear pack unit 15 is rotated rearward. It is possible.

Next, the configuration of the front door frame 14 will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the main body frame 13. The front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 21 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 21 has a substantially oval shape and is fitted with a transparent glass 22.

As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window portion 21.
For example, an annular illumination part 23 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window part 21. In the annular illumination part 23, lighting or blinking is performed in accordance with a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. In addition, an error display lamp unit 24 that is turned on at the time of a predetermined error is provided at the center of the annular illumination unit 23 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10. Further, on the left and right sides, a prize ball lamp unit 25 that is lit during the prize ball payout is provided. Also,
A speaker unit 26 is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 25 to output sound effects corresponding to the gaming state.

Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper plate 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31. Inside the lower bulging portion 32, a lower plate 34 that is also open upward is provided. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device (described later: 224) and guiding them to the game ball launching device (described later: 110) side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 33.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the window portion 21, the upper plate 33, and the lower plate 34 are integrated with the front door frame 14. In the conventional pachinko machine, at least the window part and the lower plate are provided as separate units, and the window part can be rotated independently with respect to the lower plate. There was a boundary between the units. in this case,
A fraudulent act that is performed by inserting a fraudulent jig or the like from the boundary is assumed. In addition, a fraud suppression structure can be provided at the boundary between the units in order to suppress such fraud, but this leads to a complicated configuration. Further, it is not preferable in design that a boundary is generated in the front portion of the pachinko machine. On the other hand, as described above, the window portion 21 with respect to the front door frame 14.
Since the upper plate 33 and the lower plate 34 are integrated, there is no boundary between the window portion 21 and the lower plate 34, and the above inconvenience is suppressed.

The upper bulging portion 31 is provided with a ball lending operation device 36. The ball lending operation device 36 is provided with a ball lending button 37, a return button 38, and a frequency display unit 39. Ball rental equipment Y
The ball lending operation device 36 can check the ball lending operation, the card return operation, and the card frequency with the card or the like inserted. That is, the ball lending button 37 is a card or the like (
It is operated to obtain a rental ball based on the information recorded on the recording medium), and the rental ball is paid out as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. The return button 38 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the ball lending apparatus Y. The frequency display unit 39 displays remaining amount information such as a card.

The upper bulging portion 31 is further provided with an operation button 35 that can be operated by the player.
The operation button 35 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect content of the variable display performed by the effect symbol display device (described later: 91) or changing the effect content at the time of reach.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, a game ball is launched from a game ball launch device (described later: 110).

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 15 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 201 as shown in FIG.

The back pack 201 is formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and the payout mechanism 202
Etc., and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape.

The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit (described later: 86).

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal plate 213 at the upper right portion thereof. External terminal board 2
13, a plurality of output terminals are provided, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals.

The base portion 211 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 217 that detects whether or not the main body frame 13 is opened (or closed) outside the external terminal plate 213. In a state where the main body frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the metal contact of the main body frame opening switch 217 is closed and the closing of the main body frame 13 is detected. In a state where the main body frame 13 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, The metal contact is opened and the opening of the main body frame 13 is detected.

The main body frame opening switch 217 outputs a main body frame opening signal to the main control device (described later: 162) when the main body frame 13 is in an open state, and when the main body frame 13 is in a closed state, the main body frame is opened. Stop signal output. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when the main body frame 13 is open, and a HIGH level signal is output when the main body frame 13 is closed.
The present invention is not limited to this, and a high level signal may be output when the main body frame 13 is open, and a low level signal may be output when the main body frame 13 is closed. . Moreover, it is good also as a structure which outputs an electrical signal only in the state in which the main body frame 13 is open | released.

The base portion 211 is further provided with a pair of upper and lower latch pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 13 by inserting the latch pins 214 through bearings (not shown) provided in the main body frame 13. Further, the base portion 211 is provided with a fastener 215 for fastening to a fastening hole (not shown) provided in the main body frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the main body frame 13 by fitting the fastener 215 into the fastening hole.

In the base portion 211, the payout mechanism portion 2 further bypasses the protective cover portion 212.
02 is provided. That is, a tank 221 that opens upward is provided at the top of the back pack 201. The game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 221. Below the tank 221, a tank rail 222 that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected. A case rail 223 extending in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. At the most downstream portion of the case rail 223, a dispensing device 224 is provided.
Is provided.

The case rail 223 is provided with a ball non-detection sensor 223a so as to detect a game ball connected from the tank 221 to the payout device 224 through a passage in the case rail 223. The ball non-detection sensor 223a is configured by a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and detects a change in the magnetic field when the game ball passes through the detection range and outputs it as an electrical signal. The ball non-detection sensor 223a is not limited to a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and may be any as long as it can detect a game ball. For example, a photo sensor or a limit sensor may be used. Good.

The ball non-detection sensor 223a outputs an electrical signal to the payout control device 242. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and a HIGH level signal is output when a game ball is detected. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a high level signal may be output when a game ball is not detected, and a LOW level signal may be output when a game ball is detected. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which outputs an electrical signal only in the state which is detecting the game ball.

In the payout control device 242, the tank 221 is based on the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor 223a.
It is determined whether or not the ball is in the absence of a sphere. Specifically, when the non-detected state of the game ball in the ball non-detection sensor 223a is continued until a predetermined period elapses, the tank 2
It is determined that 21 is in a no-sphere state. When it is determined by the payout control device 242 that the tank 221 is in the absence of a ball, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 224 is stopped. This prevents the dispensing device 224 from continuing to operate even though the tank 221 is in the absence of a ball. The stop of the payout operation is canceled when the ball 221 in the tank 221 is released and the game ball is detected by the ball non-detection sensor 223a. Further, when it is determined in the dispensing control device 242 that the tank 221 is in the absence of a ball, a notification process corresponding to that is executed. In addition, when a ball clogging occurs in the tank 221 and the game ball does not flow to the payout device 224 side, it is determined that there is no ball.

The case rail 223 is provided with a ball removal switch 223b. For example,
When the game balls stored in the tank 221 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, the ball removal switch 223b is pushed when all the game balls on the case rail 223 are also discharged, and stored in the case rail 223 and its downstream side. It is possible to discharge the game balls. In addition,
The installation location of the ball removal switch 223b is not limited to the case rail 223, and may be installed in the payout control device 242, for example.

In the payout device 224, game balls are paid out. The paid-out game balls are detected by a pay-out ball detection sensor 258 provided in a passage on the exit side. Then, it is supplied to the game ball distribution unit 225 provided in the base part 211 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 224.

A backpack substrate 229 is installed in the dispensing mechanism unit 202. The back pack substrate 229 is supplied with, for example, a main power of 24 volts AC and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 229a.

A control device assembly unit 204 is attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion in the front-rear direction.

The control device assembly unit 204 is configured to have a horizontally long mounting base 241. On the mounting base 241, a payout control device 242, a power source and launch control device 243, and a ball rental connection terminal plate 249 are mounted. Dispensing control device 242, power supply and launch control device 2
43 and the ball lending connection terminal plate 249 are the payout control device 242 and the ball lending connection terminal plate 24.
9 is located behind the pachinko machine 10, and the power source and the launch control device 243 are arranged so as to be in front of and behind the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 242 includes a payout control board that controls the payout device 224. The payout control board is accommodated in a colorless and transparent board box 244. The payout command signal from the payout control device 242 to the payout device 224 is relayed by the back pack substrate 229. In addition, the payout control device 242 is provided with a state return switch 245. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 224, the ball jam is eliminated. A 7-segment display 242a is mounted on the payout control board. By opening the main body frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11, the display content of the 7-segment display 242a can be visually recognized through the substrate box 244.

The power source and launch control device 243 includes a power source and launch control board that generates predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, and controls the launch of the game ball in accordance with the operation of the game ball launch handle 41. Has been. The power supply and launch control board is housed in a board box 246.

The power supply and launch control device 243 is provided with a RAM erase switch 247. The pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing various data, and even if a power failure occurs, the pachinko machine 10 can maintain the state at the time of the power failure, and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. ing.
Therefore, for example, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure as in the case of the game hall being closed, the state before the turn-off is stored and held, but if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 247, the data in the RAM is saved. It is supposed to be initialized.

The ball lending connection terminal plate 249 includes a ball lending device Y, a payout control device 242, and a ball lending operation device 36.
And is mainly connected to a ball lending operation command by a player and is output to the payout control device 242.

Next, the configuration of the game board 81 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a front view of the game board 81.
As shown in FIG. 5, the game board 81 includes a wooden base plate 8 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
1a includes a large number of nails 88 for guiding a game ball, a windmill, rails 101 and 102, a general winning opening 82,
The variable winning device 83, the starting winning port 84a, the starting winning port 84b, the variable display unit 86, and the like are assembled. And the peripheral part of the game board 81 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 13. FIG. General winning port 82, variable winning device 83, starting winning port 84a, starting winning port 84b
The variable display unit 86 is provided in a through hole formed in the base plate 81a by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 81 with a wood screw or the like. The front center portion of the game board 81 can be viewed from the front side of the front door frame 14 through the window portion 21.

An inner rail 10 formed by bending a belt-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape on the front surface of the game board 81.
1 is provided. Similarly, an outer rail 102 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is provided on the outer side of the inner rail 101. Inner rail 101 and outer rail 102
Is arranged with an interval through which game balls can pass. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 101 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 102, a resin arc member 103 formed by providing an arc on the inner surface side is provided. The arc member 103 is fixed by being driven into the base plate 81a. The front outer periphery of the game board 81 is surrounded by the rails 101 and 102, and the base plate 8
By surrounding the front and back with 1a and the glass 22, a game area where a game is played is formed on the front surface of the game board 81 by the behavior of the game ball. The game area is a substantially circular area formed on the front surface of the game board 81 and defined by the rails 101 and 102 and the arc member 103.

The rails 101 and 102 are for guiding a game ball launched from a game ball launching device (described later: 110) to the upper part of the game board 81. A return ball preventing member 104 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 101, and the game ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 81 is moved to the rail 10.
Thus, it is possible to prevent such a problem that the guide rail constituted by 1 and 102 is reversed. A return rubber 105 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 102 at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the game ball, and the game ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 105, and the game area is reduced while the momentum is attenuated. Is bounced back to the center.

A special symbol display device 93 is provided in the upper right part of the game area. Special symbol display device 9
3 is displayed by the control of the main control device 162, and mainly displays the change in the effect symbol and the result thereof, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Special symbol display device 9
3, a plurality of LEDs 93a, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display 93b are provided.

The LED 93a indicates the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 by a lighting state, indicates whether or not the production symbol is fluctuating by a lighting state, and indicates whether the stop symbol is a jackpot symbol or an off symbol depending on the lighting state. Or the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The LEDs 93a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be notified with a small number of LEDs depending on the combination of the emission colors. .

The 7-segment display 93b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error display.

A variable display unit 86 is provided at the center of the game area. Variable display unit 8
6 includes an effect symbol display device 91 composed of an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), and an LE.
An ordinary symbol display device 94 constituted by D is provided. The variable display unit 86 includes
A center frame 92 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the effect symbol display device 91.

The effect symbol display device 91 variably displays the effect symbol in response to winning in the start winning opening 84a or winning in the starting winning opening 84b. The effect symbol display device 91 includes left, middle and right 3
Two symbol rows are displayed side by side. Each symbol sequence is composed of a plurality of effect symbols, and these effect symbols are scrolled vertically for each symbol column, so that variable display is performed. The effect symbol display device 91 is configured by a variable display device such as a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix display device, and a drum that variably displays by rotation of a motor, instead of the LCD. Also good.

When a game ball wins the start winning opening 84a while the effect symbol is changing on the effect symbol display device 91, the maximum number of winnings is held four times. The number of reserved balls is displayed on the special symbol display device 93 and also displayed on the reserved lamp 95a. Four hold lamps 95a are provided for the maximum number of holds, and are provided at the lower left of the effect symbol display device 91.

If the game ball wins the start winning opening 84b while the effect symbol is changing on the effect symbol display device 91, the maximum number of winnings is held four times. The number of held balls is displayed on the special symbol display device 93 and also lit on the holding lamp 95b. Four hold lamps 95b corresponding to the maximum number of holds are provided, and are provided on the lower right side of the effect symbol display device 91.

The normal symbol display device 94 variably displays the normal symbol when the through gate 85 passes. The normal symbol display device 94 includes a normal symbol display unit 94 a and a holding lamp 96. In the normal symbol display device 94, the display unit 94 a performs variable display by alternately lighting the “O” normal symbol and the “X” normal symbol.

If the game ball passes through the through gate 85 while the normal symbol is changing on the normal symbol display device 94, the number of passes is suspended up to four times. The number of balls on hold is displayed on the special symbol display device 93 and also lit on the hold lamp 96. Four hold lamps 96 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holds, and are provided symmetrically above the effect symbol display device 91.

Below the variable display unit 86, a start winning opening 84a through which a game ball can be won is provided. When a game ball wins in the start winning opening 84a, a start winning opening sensor (described later: 154a) is turned on, and the main controller 162 is used for a big win lottery. Further, when a game ball wins at the start winning opening 84a, five game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the start winning opening 84a, a starting winning opening 84b through which a game ball can be won is provided. Movable pieces (electric tulips) are provided on both sides of the start winning opening 84b. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed with a predetermined symbol (for example, a symbol “◯”), the movable piece is opened for a predetermined time, and it becomes easy to win the start winning opening 84b. When a game ball wins the start winning opening 84b, a start winning opening sensor (described later: 154b) is turned on, and this is used as an opportunity to control the main controller 1.
At 62, a jackpot lottery is performed. Further, when a game ball wins at the start winning opening 84b, five game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A variable winning device 83 is provided below the start winning port 84b. Variable winning device 83
In the substantially central part, a horizontally-long rectangular large winning opening 83a is provided. As a result of lottery lottery,
When the jackpot is reached, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 93a is turned on so as to indicate that the jackpot is won, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect symbol display device 91, so that the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. The After that, a big hit occurs. When a big win is reached, the special winning opening 83a that is normally closed is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 29 [s] elapses or nine game balls are won). When a game ball wins the big prize opening 83a, 15 game balls are paid out as a prize ball.

The special prize opening 83a is closed when a predetermined condition is established, and after the closure, the special prize opening 83a is opened again until the predetermined condition is established. The opening / closing operation of the grand prize winning opening 83a is, for example, 1
Repeatable 5 times (15 rounds). Therefore, during the big hit, a larger amount of prize balls are paid out to the player than usual.

Specifically, the variable winning device 83 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening and closing plate that covers the large winning opening 83a, and a solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. Yes. Normally, the big winning opening 83a is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. On the other hand, at the time of a big hit, the solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, and an open state in which the game ball is likely to win the big winning opening 83a is temporarily formed. It operates so as to repeat the above state alternately.

In addition, a plurality of general winning ports 82 through which game balls can be won are provided on both the left and right sides of the start winning port 84a. When game balls win the general winning opening 82, 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, an out port 87 is provided at the bottom of the game area. Any winning mouth 82
, 83a, 84a, and 84b, the game balls that have not won a prize are led out to the discharge passage (not shown) through the out port 87.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 81. It can be visually recognized through 14 small windows.

Next, the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system 300.

As shown in FIG. 6, the control system 300 includes a main control device 162, a payout control device 242, an audio lamp control device 143, and a display control device 302 that performs display control of the effect symbol display device 91.
And a power source and launch control device 243.

The main control unit 162 includes an MPU (Micro Processing Unit) 310 that is a one-chip type microprocessor such as a DIP (Dual Inline Package), an input port 316 for inputting data from the outside of the main control unit 162, and the main control unit 162 and an output port 318 for outputting data to the outside. The MPU 310, the input port 316 and the output port 318 are connected to each other via the bus 320.

The MPU 310 includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 312 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 310 and fixed value data, a RAM 314 that functions as a work area for storing various data when the control program is executed, It has various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit.

The RAM 314 has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 310, a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 310, and a work area for storing values such as various flags, counters, and I / Os (work Region). R
The AM 314 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power source and the launch control device 243 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down, and the data can be retained (backed up), and all the data stored in the RAM 314 is backed up. .

When the power is shut down (including when the power is shut down due to a power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the value of I / O etc. is R
Stored in the AM 314. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to power failure cancellation.
Similarly, based on the information stored in the RAM 314, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off. Writing to the RAM 314 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (FIG. 18), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 314 is executed in the startup process (FIG. 17) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal of the MPU 310 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 243c when the power is shut off.
In the PU 310, when the power failure signal SG1 is input, an NMI interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed as a power failure process.

The input port 316 has a winning mouth sensor 1 that detects a game ball won in each general winning mouth 82.
52a to 152c and a count sensor 15 that detects a game ball won in the variable winning device 83
3, a start winning port sensor 154a for detecting a game ball won in the start winning port 84a, a start winning port sensor 154b for detecting a game ball won in the start winning port 84b, and the through gate 8
A gate sensor 155 that detects a game ball passing through 5, a launch control unit 243b, a RAM erase switch circuit 243d, a payout control device 242, and the like are connected.

The output port 318 includes a payout control device 242, a sound lamp control device 143, a special symbol display device 93, a normal symbol display device 94, an external terminal board 213, and a launch control unit 243b.
And the solenoid of the variable winning device 83 are connected. The MPU 310 sends various commands for performing the effect control of the game via the output port 318 to the voice lamp control device 14.
3, various commands for performing payout control of the game ball are transmitted to the payout control device 242. The communication with the sound lamp control device 143 is one-way from the main control device 162 to the sound lamp control device 143. On the other hand, communication with the payout control device 242 is
It is bidirectional.

The payout control device 242 is connected to a main control device 162, a payout device 224, a ball lending connection terminal plate 249, and a ball non-detection sensor 223a. Furthermore, the ball rental connection terminal board 24
9 is connected to a ball lending device Y.

A main control device 162, a sound output device 362, a lamp display device 364, a display control device 302, and an operation button 35 are connected to the sound lamp control device 143. Furthermore, an effect symbol display device 91 is connected to the display control device 302.

The power supply and launch control device 243 is a power supply unit 24 that supplies power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10.
3a, a launch control unit 243b for controlling the launch of the game ball, a power failure monitoring circuit 243c for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 243d to which the RAM erase switch 247 is connected. ing.

The power supply unit 243a is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall via a transformer. Then, based on the external power supplied from the transformer, a necessary operating voltage is supplied to each of the control devices 162, 242, 143, 302 and the like. As its outline, the power supply unit 243a takes in the AC 24 volt power supplied from the transformer, drives the various switches, solenoids, motors, etc., 12 volt voltage, logic 5 volt voltage, RAM Generate backup voltage for backup, etc.
A voltage of 5 volts, a voltage of 5 volts, and a backup voltage are applied to the control devices 162, 241, 1
43, 302, etc.

The game ball launcher 110 is connected to the launch controller 243b. Launch control unit 243
b is a game ball launch handle 4 when the main controller 162 instructs to launch a game ball.
The game ball launcher 110 is controlled so that the game ball is launched with a launch intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of 1. Specifically, when a player touches the game ball launch handle 41 with a touch sensor (not shown) and a launch stop switch (not shown) for stopping launch is not operated, The solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the game ball launch handle 41, and the game ball is launched with a launch intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the game ball launch handle 41.

The power failure monitoring circuit 243c is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SG1 when the power is shut off. The power failure monitoring circuit 243c monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 243a, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown) occurs when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Power failure signal SG1 is output to control device 162 and payout control device 242. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 162 and the payout controller 242 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 13). The power supply unit 243a has a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system 300, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. It is configured to maintain the output at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 162 and payout controller 242 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

When the RAM erase switch 247 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 243d
This circuit outputs a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 162 and the payout controller 242. Main controller 162 and payout controller 24
When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power is turned on, the backup data is cleared.

Next, the display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 will be described.
FIG. 7 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the effect symbol display device 91.

FIG. 7A schematically shows the display screen area division setting and the effective line setting, and FIG.
) Shows an example of an actual display screen.

The production symbols are composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”.
Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers “0” to “9” in front of a symbol made of a wooden box.
Of these, the main symbols with odd numbers (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “9”) have a large number added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, even numbers (“0”, “2”
, “4”, “6”, “8”), the main symbol with a guard on the front of the wooden box,
An attached symbol imitating a character such as a helmet is added, and an even number is added to the lower right of the attached symbol so that it is small in green and displayed in front of the attached symbol.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 is roughly divided into two vertically. The lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for displaying the effect symbols in a variable manner, and the other upper third is the auxiliary display area Ds for displaying the notice effect and the character.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right.
Three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, effect symbols “0” to “9” are displayed in a predetermined order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order.
Fluctuation display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity every 1 to Z3. In the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so that they appear in descending order. The middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

In the main display area Dm, a maximum of three effect symbols can be displayed for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle portion of the main display area Dm is the effective line L1, and the effect symbols are stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 in each variable display. A jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot if the jackpot symbols are arranged on the active line L1 when the effect symbol is stopped.

Further, in the lower left of the main display area Dm, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of balls held in the start winning opening 84a corresponds to the number of held balls in the start winning opening 84b in the lower right of the main display area Dm. A number of reserved ball symbols are displayed. In the example of FIG. 7, there are three reserved ball symbols R on the lower left of the main display area Dm.
Since m1 to Rm3 are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls at the start winning opening 84a is currently three. On the other hand, since one reserved ball symbol Rm4 is displayed at the lower right of the main display area Dm, it indicates that the number of held balls in the start winning opening 84b is currently one.

The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm. Furthermore, it is equally divided into three notice areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Here, the right and left notice areas Ds
1 and Ds3 are usually covered with a double-open opaque door that is electrically opened and closed by a solenoid, and sometimes the solenoid is energized and the door is opened to the front so that it can be visually recognized by the player It is an area. The center notice area Ds2 is a display area that is always visible without being covered by the door.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 7B, a total of nine effect symbols are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, the left and right doors are closed, and the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3 are covered and the display screen cannot be visually recognized. If one or both of the left and right doors are opened during the variable display, a video is displayed in the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3, and the player is informed that it is easier to make a big hit than usual. Is done. In the center notice area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy with a bee) performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action or a different character. Appearance effect is performed when appears. The display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 is divided into upper and lower display areas Dm and Ds in principle. However, the effect symbols and characters are displayed larger across the display areas Dm and Ds. It can also be done.

Next, the type of game state (hereinafter referred to as game type) will be described.
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the jackpot type.

In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG.
There are five non-probable jackpots, probable jackpots, JUB (Jump Up Bonus) jackpots, sudden jackpots and latent jackpots. In addition, a small hit is also defined as a hit type.

As a result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type lottery, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a to indicate that it is a non-probable variation jackpot, and the effect symbol display device 91 includes the jackpot symbol. The non-probable variation symbol is stopped and displayed, and then control is performed so that the non-probable variation jackpot is generated. The non-probable variation symbol is, for example, a production symbol display device 91.
, The main symbol is a combination of even-numbered slots such as “222”, “444”, and “666”. Also, in the first round, the grand prize opening 83a is kept for a long time (for example, 2
9 [s]) A round to be released (hereinafter referred to as a long open round) continues for a maximum of 15 times. When nine game balls are won in the big prize opening 83a while the big prize opening 83a is open, one round is completed even before the opening time elapses. After the jackpot presentation is over, the winning probability of the jackpot lottery is controlled to be in a normal state lower than the probability variation state, and the short time state in which the variation time of the production symbol is shorter than the normal state is a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Control to continue.

In the short time state, (1) the opening time of the movable piece of the start winning opening 84b becomes longer than the normal state (for example, in the normal state, the opening of 0.2 [s] is performed, but in the short time state, 2 [
s] is released. ) Or (2) The number of times the movable piece is opened is greater than in the normal state (for example, one opening is performed in the normal state, and three opening is performed in the short time state).
Or (3) the winning probability that the movable piece is released is higher than in the normal state, or (4) the normal symbol variation time is shorter than in the normal state. In addition, you may carry out combining these (1)-(4) arbitrarily. For example, (1) the opening time of the movable piece is longer than the normal state, and (3)
The winning probability that the movable piece opens may be higher than in the normal state. Further, for example, (2) the number of opening of the movable piece may be larger than that in the normal state, and (4) the variation time of the normal symbol may be shorter than that in the normal state. In this manner, in the short time state, the chances of winning the winning prize opening 84b increase, so that the digestion of the game ball can be suppressed.

As a result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type lottery, if the probability variation jackpot is reached, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a to indicate that it is a probability variation jackpot, and the effect symbol display device 91 causes the probability variation symbol among the jackpot symbols. Is controlled so that a probabilistic jackpot is generated. The probability variation symbol is, for example, in the production symbol display device 91,
The main symbol is a combination of odd numbers such as “111”, “333”, and “555”. In addition, the long open round continues up to 15 times. When nine game balls are won in the big prize opening 83a while the big prize opening 83a is open, one round is completed even before the opening time elapses. After the jackpot effect is finished, control is performed so that the probability variation state is achieved, and control is performed so that the short-time state continues until the next jackpot.

As a result of jackpot lottery and jackpot type lottery,
The special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a so as to indicate that it is a big hit, and the stunning symbol out of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect symbol display device 91, and then JU
Control so that B jackpot is generated. The stochastic symbol is, for example, a combination that is difficult to distinguish from an off symbol such as “341”. A predetermined time after the start of the jackpot production (for example, 25 [s]
) Is displayed on the effect symbol display device 91 that the jackpot has occurred. In addition, a round (hereinafter referred to as a short opening round) that opens the grand prize winning opening 83a for a short time (for example, 60 [ms]) in 15 rounds continues 15 times, and then a long opening round has a maximum of 14 rounds.
Continues times. If nine game balls are won in the big prize opening 83a while the big prize opening 83a is open,
One round ends even before the opening time has elapsed. After the jackpot effect is finished, control is performed so that the probability variation state is achieved, and control is performed so that the short-time state continues until the next jackpot.

As a result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type lottery, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a to indicate that it is a winning jackpot, and the effect symbol display device 91 causes the winning symbol display device 91 to display the winning symbol. Is displayed in a stopped state, and then control is performed so that a sudden big hit occurs. When a predetermined time (for example, 25 [s]) has elapsed after the start of the jackpot effect, the effect symbol display device 91 displays that the probability change state is reached. In addition, 15 short open rounds continue. When nine game balls are won in the big prize opening 83a while the big prize opening 83a is open, one round is completed even before the opening time elapses. After the jackpot effect is finished, control is performed so that the probability variation state is achieved, and control is performed so that the short-time state continues until the next jackpot.

As a result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type lottery, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a so as to indicate that it is a potential hit jackpot, and the effect symbol display device 91 includes the jackpot symbol. The control is performed so that the suspicious symbol is stopped and displayed, and then a latent big hit is generated. In addition, 15 short open rounds continue. Grand prize opening 83
If nine game balls are won in the grand prize opening 83a while a is open, the first round ends even before the opening time has elapsed. After the jackpot effect is finished, control is performed so that the probability variation state is achieved, and control is performed so that the time-saving state continues until the next jackpot only in the time-saving state.
In the latent jackpot, the period of one round (opening time) is extremely short, and no notification that a jackpot has occurred is performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an unexpectedness as if the player suddenly shifted to a probable state without making a big hit.

As for the jackpot generation ratio, for jackpots based on winning at the start winning opening 84a, non-probable variation jackpot, probability variation jackpot, JUB jackpot, sudden jackpot and latent probability jackpot are 35:
35: 4: 16: 10. On the other hand, the jackpot based on winning at the start winning opening 84b is 35: 60: 4: 1: 0. Since the winning ball is not paid out in the case of the winning jackpot and the latent winning jackpot, the ratio at which the winning ball is paid out at the jackpot based on the winning to the starting winning port 84a is 35 + 35 + 4 = 74, whereas the starting winning port 8
The rate at which a prize ball is paid out in the case of a big hit based on winning in 4b is 35 + 60 + 4 = 99. Therefore, the winning jackpot based on the winning at the start winning opening 84b is the start winning opening 84.
The number of prize balls to be paid out is larger than the jackpot based on winning a. On the other hand, when the non-probable big hit, the probable big hit, the JUB big hit, or the sudden big hit, the time is shortened and it becomes easy to win the start winning hole 84b. Although details will be described later, the reserved ball of the start winning opening 84b is preferentially digested over the reserved ball of the start winning opening 84a. Therefore, under normal conditions,
The winning prize is mainly paid to the start winning opening 84a, so the ratio of the prize balls to be paid out at the time of the big hit is low.
Once a non-probable jackpot, probable jackpot, JUB jackpot or sudden jackpot is won, the winning ball is won at the start winning hole 84b and the reserved ball is preferentially digested. The ratio is higher. Thereby, since the player has high expectation that it will become a non-probable big hit, a probable big hit, a JUB big hit, or a sudden big hit, it can improve the taste of the game.

As a result of the big win lottery and the small win lottery, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a so as to indicate that it is a small win, and the effect design display device 91 makes the winning symbol out of the big hit symbols. Is controlled so that a small hit occurs after that. In addition, the operation of opening the special winning opening 83a for a short time (for example, 60 [ms]) is 1
Continue 5 times. When nine game balls are won in the big prize opening 83a while the big prize opening 83a is open, the small hit effect ends. After the small hit effect is finished, control is performed so as to maintain the original state. For example, the probability variation state and the time reduction state are maintained in the probability variation state and the time reduction state, and the normal state and non-time reduction state are maintained in the normal state and the non-time reduction state.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, two types of out-of-reach and out-of-reach are defined as out-of-game types among the game types.

As a result of the big hit lottery and the reach lottery, if the reach is lost, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a so as to indicate that it is out of reach. At the same time, the left symbol and the right symbol among the three symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the player is expected to win the jackpot. Further, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the right symbol, so that the out-of-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect symbol display device 91, and thereafter, control is performed so that the symbol is removed.

As a result of the jackpot lottery and the reach lottery, if the non-reach is lost, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a to indicate that it is out of reach, and the reach symbol display device 91 does not perform the reach effect. Reach out-of-reach symbols are displayed in a stopped manner, and then controlled so that they are removed. The non-reach out symbol is a combination of at least the left symbol and the right symbol out of the three effect symbols.

Next, a random number counter used in the main controller 162 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a counter buffer and a reserved ball storage area of the RAM 314.

The MPU 310 uses a variety of random number counters to win a jackpot lottery and special symbol display device 93.
Set the display settings. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, a jackpot random number counter C1 for performing jackpot lottery, a jackpot type random number counter C2 for performing jackpot type lottery, a reach random number counter C3 for performing reach lottery, A variation pattern random number counter CS for determining the variation pattern of the effect design is used. The jackpot random number counter C
A first initial value random number counter CINI1 for setting an initial value of 1, and a normal symbol display device 9
The normal lottery random number counter C4 for performing the normal lottery that displays the lottery result in 4 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 for setting the initial value of the normal lottery random number counter C4 are used.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “738”. Each time it is updated, the current value is “1”.
When the maximum value (“738”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the jackpot random number counter C1, the initial value is set to the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 when the maximum value is reached. The value of a random number that is a big hit (hereinafter referred to as a big hit value) is set in each of the normal state and the probability variation state. In the normal state, for example, the number of jackpot values is two, and the values are “373” and “727”. On the other hand, for the probability variation state, for example, the number of jackpot values is 14, and the values are “59”, “109”.
”,“ 163 ”,“ 211 ”,“ 263 ”,“ 317 ”,“ 367 ”,“ 421 ”,“ 4 ”
79 ”,“ 523 ”,“ 631 ”,“ 683 ”, and“ 733 ”. Also, the random number value (hereinafter referred to as “small hit value”) that is a small hit is “157”, for example.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 has the same numerical value range as the jackpot random number counter C1 (
It is configured as a loop counter that can take any value of “0” to “738”). At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“738”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the initial value is
Set to “0”. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is a jackpot random number counter C1
It is updated at a different period. Thereby, since the big hit random number counter C1 can be irregularly updated, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed.

The jackpot type random number counter C2 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “99”. With each update, the current value is set to “1”
”Is added, and when it exceeds the maximum value (“ 99 ”), it returns to the initial value. In the case of the jackpot type random number counter C2, the initial value is set to “0”. For the start winning opening 84a, a random number value (hereinafter referred to as a non-probable variation jackpot type value) that becomes a non-probable variation jackpot is:
For example, “0” to “34”. For example, random number values that are probable jackpots (hereinafter referred to as probable jackpot type values) are “35” to “69”, for example. The random number value (hereinafter referred to as JUB jackpot type value) that is a JUB jackpot is, for example, “70” to “73”.
It has become. The random number value (hereinafter referred to as “accuracy big hit type value”),
For example, “74” to “89”. For example, the value of a random number that is a potential big hit (hereinafter referred to as a latent big hit type value) is “90” to “99”, for example. On the other hand, for the start winning opening 84b, for example, the non-probable variation jackpot type value is “0” to “34”, the probable variation jackpot type value is “35” to “94”, and the JUB jackpot type value is “95” to “95”. 98 ”, and the type value of sudden hit is“ 99 ”.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “1998”. Each time it is updated, the current value is “1”.
When the maximum value (“1998”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the reach random number counter C3, the initial value is set to “0”. Random values (hereinafter referred to as reach values) for performing a reach effect when deviating are, for example, “1887” to “1998”.

The variation pattern random number counter CS is configured as, for example, a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “210”. With each update, the current value is
When “1” is added and the maximum value (“210”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored.
In the case of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS, the initial value is set to “0”.

The normal lottery random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “250”, for example. Each time it is updated, the current value is “1”.
When the maximum value (“250”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the normal lottery random number counter C4, the initial value is set to the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 when the maximum value is reached. The number of random number values to be won is, for example, 149, and the values are “5” to “153”.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is the same numerical value range as the normal lottery random number counter C4 (
It is configured as a loop counter that can take any value of “0” to “250”). At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“250”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the initial value is
Set to “0”. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is a normal lottery random number counter C4.
It is updated at a different period. As a result, the regular lottery random number counter C4 can be updated irregularly, so that illegal acts can be prevented.

The RAM 314 is provided with a counter buffer. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is stored in the counter buffer.

The RAM 314 includes a reserved ball storage area corresponding to the start winning opening 84a and a starting winning opening 84.
A holding ball storage area corresponding to b is provided. The reserved ball storage area corresponding to the start winning opening 84a is composed of one execution area and four reserved areas. One holding area stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation pattern random number counter CS at the timing when the game ball wins in the start winning opening 84a. Specifically, if no random number counter value is stored in any of the reserved areas, it is stored in the first reserved area. When a random number counter value is stored in the first reserved area, it is stored in the second reserved area. If random number counter values are stored in the first and second reserved areas, they are stored in the third reserved area. If random number counter values are stored in the first to third reserved areas, they are stored in the fourth reserved area. If random number counter values are stored in all reserved areas, they are not stored in any reserved area.

The random number counter value in the holding area is shifted to the execution area side every time a big hit lottery is performed. Specifically, the random number counter value of the first holding area is shifted to the execution area, and then
The random number counter value in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area. Next, the random number counter value in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and then the random number counter value in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

Similarly, the reserved ball storage area corresponding to the start winning opening 84b is composed of four reserved areas. As the execution area, the execution area of the reserved ball storage area corresponding to the start winning opening 84a is used in common. One holding area stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation pattern random number counter CS at the timing when the game ball wins the start winning opening 84b. Storage and shift to the reserved area are the same as in the reserved ball storage area corresponding to the start winning opening 84a.

Next, the type of command will be described.
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing command types.
As types of commands, there are a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a confirmation command, and a prefetch command as shown in FIG.

The variation pattern command is a command for designating any one of a plurality of variation patterns. The variation pattern corresponds to the game type. For example, the variation pattern 3 corresponds to a gaming state that is lost after performing a normal reach that is a normal reach production, and the variation pattern 8 performs a super reach that is a flashy reach production that has a longer variation time than the normal reach. Corresponds to the gaming state that will later become a non-probable jackpot. In addition, the fluctuation pattern 10 corresponds to a gaming state that is a promising big hit after performing a special reach that is a flashy reach production that has a longer fluctuation time than the super reach, and the fluctuation pattern 12 is abrupt after the special fluctuation display is performed. It corresponds to the game state that is a big hit. The variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 at the start of variation of the effect symbol together with the stop type command.

The stop type command includes a command for designating a non-reach off symbol as a stop symbol for the production symbol, a command for designating a non-reach symbol as a stop symbol for the production symbol, and a non-probable variation symbol as the stop symbol of the production symbol. It includes a command for designating, a command for designating a probable variation symbol as a stop symbol of the effect design, and a command for designating an abrupt design as a stop symbol of the effect design. These do not specify the specific content of the stop symbol,
It simply specifies the type of stop symbol. That is, only the stop symbol type is determined by the main controller 162 and the specific contents of the stop symbol are determined by the display controller 302, so that the processing load on the main controller 162 can be reduced. The stop type command is
Along with the variation pattern command, it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 when the variation of the effect symbol is started.

The confirmation command is a command for designating confirmation of the stop display of the effect symbol. The confirmation command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 at the end of the variation of the effect symbol.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a model that performs a pre-reading effect. The pre-reading effect means that when the number of held balls in the start winning opening 84a is “0” or more and less than “4”, a game ball wins the start winning opening 84a or the number of held balls in the start winning opening 84b is When it is “0” or more and less than “4”, the game ball is won at the start winning opening 84b, and (1) when it is determined that it is a big hit based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 or the like acquired at that timing A special effect (for example, an effect that turns the corresponding reserved ball symbol into a star symbol) to give a notice that the reserved ball to be digested will be a big hit, and (2) a jackpot random number counter C1
If it is determined that it is a small hit based on the value of, etc., a special effect is performed to give an announcement that the reserved ball that is subsequently digested will be a small hit, and (3)
When it is determined that the game is out based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like, it is an effect that gives a notice that the reserved ball to be digested later will be released by performing a special effect. The pre-read command is a 2-byte command for designating a variation pattern, and 2 for designating the number of pre-read hold balls indicating the number of reserved balls related to the pre-reading effect (what number is the reserved ball that is a big hit). This is a byte command. Therefore, the prefetch command is composed of commands of a total of 4 bytes. However, the command for designating the variation pattern among the pre-read commands has a data structure different from the variation pattern command so that the voice lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 can distinguish the pre-read command and the variation pattern command ( For example, the type data in FIG. The number of pre-reading reserved balls is the start winning opening 84a
Indicates either the number of pre-reading reserved balls corresponding to 1 or the number of pre-reading reserved balls corresponding to the start winning opening 84b. The pre-read command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 when winning at the start winning opening 84a or winning at the starting winning opening 84b.

As other command types, there are a payout initialization command, a payout return command, a prize ball command, a power-off command, and other various commands. The commands in FIG. 10 are merely representative commands.

Next, the data structure of the ROM 312 will be described.
The ROM 312 stores a plurality of variation pattern tables for determining a variation pattern and a distribution structure table for determining the variation pattern table.

First, the data structure of the distribution structure table will be described.
FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a part of the data structure of the distribution structure table 404.

The variation pattern table is provided corresponding to each of the big hit, the small hit, and the off.

A plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to jackpots are provided for each jackpot type.

A plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to non-probable variation jackpots (hereinafter referred to as non-probability variation jackpot variation pattern tables) are provided for each number of reserved balls. A non-probable variation jackpot variation pattern table corresponding to each number of reserved balls is further provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. The non-probable variation jackpot variation pattern table shares a part of the variation pattern table corresponding to the probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the probability variation jackpot variation pattern table). Therefore, there is no dedicated variation pattern table corresponding only to the uncertain variation big hit. As a result, since it is not possible to distinguish non-probable big hit or probable big jackpot from the fluctuation pattern determined by the non-probable big jackpot pattern table, we can have expectation for the probable big jackpot even in the case of non-probable big jackpot, The taste of the game can be improved. The non-probability large hit variation pattern table is referred to after the number of reserved balls is subtracted (described later: steps S606, S622, and S704), so the range of the number of reserved balls is “0” to “3”. It has become. Further, in FIG. 11, the range where the number of reserved balls is “0” to “3” is illustrated for convenience, but actually, a non-probable large hit variation pattern table is provided for each number of held balls. The same applies to the other variation pattern tables.

The variation pattern command determined by the non-probable variation jackpot variation pattern table does not match the variation pattern command determined by the variation pattern table corresponding to the game type other than the probability variation jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 302 can specify the non-probable variation jackpot or the probability variation jackpot from the variation pattern command.

A plurality of probability variation jackpot variation pattern tables are provided for each number of reserved balls. A probability variation jackpot variation pattern table corresponding to each number of reserved balls is further provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. Of the probability variation jackpot variation pattern table, the variation pattern command determined by the dedicated variation pattern table corresponding only to the probability variation jackpot does not match the variation pattern command determined by the variation pattern table corresponding to another game type. Therefore, the display control device 302 can identify the probable big hit from the variation pattern command.

A plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to JUB jackpots (hereinafter referred to as JUB jackpot variation pattern tables) are provided for each number of reserved balls. JU corresponding to each number of reserved balls
The B big hit variation pattern table is further provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. The variation pattern command determined by the JUB jackpot variation pattern table does not match the variation pattern command determined by the variation pattern table corresponding to another game type. Therefore, the display control device 302 can specify the JUB jackpot from the variation pattern command.

A plurality of variation pattern tables (hereinafter referred to as “accuracy large hit variation pattern tables”) corresponding to the likelihood big hits are provided for each number of reserved balls. A random hit variation pattern table corresponding to each number of held balls is further provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. The variation pattern command determined by the random hit variation pattern table does not match the variation pattern command determined by the variation pattern table corresponding to another game type. Therefore, the display control device 302 can identify the sudden hit from the variation pattern command.

A plurality of variation pattern tables (hereinafter referred to as “latency probability variation pattern table”) corresponding to the latent probability hit are provided for each number of reserved balls. A latent probability hit variation pattern table corresponding to each number of reserved balls is further provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. The variation pattern command determined by the probability hit variation pattern table does not match the variation pattern command determined by the variation pattern table corresponding to another game type. Therefore, the display control device 302 can specify the latent probability big hit from the variation pattern command.

A plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to small hits (hereinafter referred to as small hit variation pattern tables) are provided for each number of reserved balls. The small hit variation pattern table corresponding to each number of reserved balls is further provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. The variation pattern command determined by the small hit variation pattern table does not match the variation pattern command determined by the variation pattern table corresponding to another game type. Therefore, the display control device 302 can identify the small hit from the variation pattern command.

On the other hand, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to detachment (hereinafter referred to as detachment variation pattern tables) are provided for each number of reserved balls. A deviation variation pattern table corresponding to each number of reserved balls is further provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. Here, the variation pattern table corresponding to the reach failure and the variation pattern table corresponding to the non-reach failure are provided separately. For example, in the example of FIG. 11, the deviation variation pattern table corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to “0” to “1886” corresponds to the variation pattern table corresponding to the non-reach deviation, and the other variation variation pattern tables. However, it corresponds to the variation pattern table corresponding to the loss of reach. In the example of FIG. 11, only the number of reserved balls is in the range of “0” to “1”, but the range of “2” to “3”
A deviation variation pattern table is provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3.

The variation pattern command determined by the deviation variation pattern table does not match the variation pattern command determined by the variation pattern table corresponding to another game type.
Therefore, the display control device 302 can identify either out of reach or out of reach from the variation pattern command.

In the distribution structure table 404, as shown in FIG. 11, addresses to the variation pattern table are registered for each of the jackpot, jackpot and miss, jackpot type, number of reserved balls, and reach random number counter value. . In the example of FIG. 11, the result of the jackpot lottery is “jackpot”
If the result of the lottery type lottery is “non-probable variation big hit”, the number of held balls is any of “0” to “3” and the value of the reach random number counter is any of “0” to “998”, it fluctuates Addresses to the pattern table 1 are associated.

Next, the data structure of the variation pattern table will be described.
FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating the data structure of the variation pattern table 406.

As shown in FIG. 12, the fluctuation pattern table 406 includes a fluctuation pattern random number counter C.
Corresponding to the numerical value range of S, for example, 211 records are registered. Each record includes a field for registering a variation pattern number indicating a variation pattern.
The value of the variation pattern random number counter CS is acquired, the variation pattern number is read from the record of the rank of the acquired random number counter value, and the variation pattern specified by the read variation pattern number is determined. For example, when the random number counter value is “30”, the variation pattern number is read from the 30th record. In the example of FIG. 12, “18” is read from the fluctuation pattern table 406, so that the fluctuation pattern 18 is determined.

Next, processing executed by the main controller 162 will be described.
The MPU 310 activates a control program stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 312 and executes main control processing. The main control process is broadly divided into an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal, a timer interrupt process activated periodically, and a startup process activated upon power-on. The main process is executed after the start-up process.

First, the NMI interrupt process will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by main controller 162.

The NMI interrupt process is a process that is started by interrupting the current control when the power failure signal SG1 is input from the NMI terminal. When the NMI interrupt process is executed in the MPU 310, as shown in FIG. Migrate to

In step S100, a power failure flag indicating whether or not a power interruption has occurred is turned on, a series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

Next, the timer interrupt process will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by main controller 162.

The timer interrupt process is a process executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 [ms])
When executed in 310, the process proceeds to step S200 as shown in FIG.

In step S200, the winning prize sensors 152a to 152 except for the RAM erase switch 247 are used.
52c, count sensor 153, start prize opening sensors 154a, 154b, gate sensor 1
A switch reading process for various sensors such as 55 and various switches (hereinafter referred to as switches in this paragraph) is executed. In the switch reading process, the state of the switch or the like is read, the state of the switch or the like is determined, and detection information indicating the detection result of the switch or the like is stored in the RAM 314. This is performed for each switch.

Next, the process proceeds to step S202, where the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second
The initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CIN
“1” is added to each value of I1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and each value is set to “0” when exceeding the maximum value. The updated values are stored in the counter buffer.

Next, the process proceeds to step S204, where the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary lottery random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, “1” is added to each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal lottery random number counter C4, and when the maximum value is exceeded, the initial value is set. To do. For the initial value, the jackpot type random number counter C
2 and the reach random number counter C3 are set to “0”, the jackpot random number counter C1 is set to the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 when the maximum value is reached, and the normal lottery random number counter C4 is set to the maximum value Is set to the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2.
The updated values are stored in the counter buffer.

Next, the process proceeds to step S206, and the start winning process 1 for determining the winning at the start winning opening 84a is executed, and the process proceeds to step S208 to execute the start winning process 2 for determining the winning at the starting winning opening 84b. Then, the series of processes is terminated and the original process is restored.

Next, the start winning process 1 in step S206 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 1 executed by the main controller 162.

The start winning process 1 is a process for determining a winning to the start winning opening 84a, and is step S2.
When executed in 06, the process proceeds to step S300 as shown in FIG.

In step S300, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the start winning opening 84a based on the detection information in the RAM 314. In step S200, if there is a winning at the starting winning port 84a, the signal from the starting winning port sensor 154a becomes high level (or low level), and this is detected and a predetermined bit is turned on ("1"). ) Is stored in the RAM 314. On the other hand, when there is no winning at the start winning port 84a, the starting winning port sensor 154 is displayed.
Since the signal from a becomes low level (or high level), this is detected, and detection information in which a predetermined bit is turned off (“0”) is stored in the RAM 314. And step S300
Then, when the detection information obtained by executing the timer interruption process three times is “011” (the left bit indicates the past detection result), it is assumed that the game ball has won the start winning opening 84a. judge. That is, in order to determine the winning to the start winning opening 84a in step S300, it is necessary to execute the timer interruption process three times.

On the other hand, for example, when the detection information is “01”, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which it is determined that a game ball has won the start winning opening 84a. However, in this configuration, erroneous detection is caused by the influence of noise. there is a possibility. On the other hand, the configuration of the present embodiment has the effect of noise (for example,
In the case of “010”, noise resistance can be improved.
When a game ball is won at the start winning opening 84a, considering the interrupt period of the timer interruption process, even if the game ball is fast, about 8 to 10 “1” s are continuously detected. The information cannot be “010”, and even if the configuration of the present embodiment is adopted, there is no problem that the winning at the start winning opening 84a cannot be detected.

When it is determined as a result of the determination in step S300 that a game ball has won the start winning opening 84a
(YES) moves to step S302.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the value N1 of the retained ball number counter is less than “4”. If it is determined that the value N1 of the retained ball number counter is less than “4” (YES), step S3 is performed.
The process proceeds to 04, "1" is added to the value N1 of the reserved ball number counter, and the process proceeds to Step S306.

In step S306, jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type random number counter C2,
Each value of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS is acquired, and each value of the acquired random number counter is stored in the reserved ball storage area. Specifically, if no random number counter value is stored in any reserved area, the random number counter value is stored in the first reserved area. When the random number counter value is stored in the first reserved area, the random number counter value is stored in the second reserved area. If random number counter values are stored in the first and second reserved areas,
The random number counter value is stored in the third reserved area. If random number counter values are stored in the first to third reserved areas, the random number counter values are stored in the fourth reserved area.

Next, the process proceeds to step S308, where the pre-reading effect process (step S) of the start winning opening 84a is performed.
The process of 308-S314 and S800-S824 is said. The same applies hereinafter. ) Is being executed, it is determined whether or not the prefetching process flag 1 is turned off. If it is determined that the prefetching process flag 1 is off (YES), It is determined that the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84a is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S310, the pre-reading process flag 1 is turned on,
The process proceeds to step S312.

In step S312, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number counter C2,
Each value of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS is acquired, each value of the acquired random number counter is stored in the RAM 314 as the prefetch determination value 1, and the process proceeds to step S314, where the value N1 of the reserved ball number counter Is stored in the RAM 314 as the number of pre-reading spheres 1, and a series of processes is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S308 that the prefetching processing flag 1 is on (N
O) determines that the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84a is being executed, ends the series of processes, and returns to the original process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S302 that the value N1 of the held ball number counter is “4” or more (NO), and if it is determined in step S300 that no game ball is won in the start winning opening 84a ( In each case of NO), a series of processing is terminated and the original processing is restored.

Next, the start winning process 2 in step S208 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 executed by the main controller 162.

The start winning process 2 is a process for determining a winning to the start winning opening 84b, and is step S2.
If executed in 08, the process proceeds to step S350 as shown in FIG.

In step S350, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the start winning opening 84b based on the detection information in the RAM 314. In step S200, if there is a winning at the starting winning port 84b, the signal from the starting winning port sensor 154b becomes high level (or low level), and this is detected and a predetermined bit is turned on ("1"). ) Is stored in the RAM 314. On the other hand, when there is no winning at the start winning port 84b, the starting winning port sensor 154 is displayed.
Since the signal from b becomes a low level (or a high level), this is detected, and detection information in which a predetermined bit is turned off (“0”) is stored in the RAM 314. And step S350
Then, when the detection information obtained by executing the timer interruption process three times is “011” (the left bit indicates the past detection result), it is assumed that the game ball has won the start winning opening 84b. judge. That is, in order to determine the winning to the start winning opening 84b in step S350, it is necessary to execute the timer interruption process three times.

On the other hand, for example, when the detection information is “01”, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which it is determined that a game ball has won the start winning opening 84b. However, in this configuration, erroneous detection is caused by the influence of noise. there is a possibility. On the other hand, the configuration of the present embodiment has the effect of noise (for example,
In the case of “010”, noise resistance can be improved.
In addition, when a game ball is won at the start winning opening 84b, considering the interruption period of the timer interruption process, even if the game ball is fast, about 8 to 10 “1” s are continuously detected as detection information. The information cannot be “010”, and even if the configuration of the present embodiment is adopted, there is no problem that the winning at the start winning opening 84b cannot be detected.

When it is determined as a result of the determination in step S350 that a game ball has won the start winning opening 84b
(YES) moves to step S352.

In step S352, it is determined whether or not the value N2 of the retained ball number counter is less than “4”. If it is determined that the value N2 of the retained ball number counter is less than “4” (YES), step S3 is performed.
The process proceeds to 54, where “1” is added to the value N2 of the held ball number counter, and the process proceeds to Step S356.

In step S356, similar to the processing in step S306, the jackpot random number counter C1
The respective values of the jackpot type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation pattern random number counter CS are acquired, each value of the acquired random number counter is stored in the reserved ball storage area, and the process proceeds to step S358.

In step S358, the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84b (steps S358 to S36).
4. Refers to the processing of S850 to S874. The same applies hereinafter. ) Is being executed, it is determined whether the pre-reading flag 2 is turned off, and if it is determined that the pre-reading flag 2 is off (YES) It is determined that the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84b is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S360, the pre-reading process flag 2 is turned on, and step S36 is performed.
Move to 2.

In step S362, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number counter C2,
Each value of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS is acquired, each value of the acquired random number counter is stored in the RAM 314 as the prefetch determination value 2, and the process proceeds to step S364, where the value N2 of the reserved ball number counter Is stored in the RAM 314 as the number of pre-reading balls, and a series of processing is terminated and the original processing is restored.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S358 that the prefetching flag 2 is on (N
O) determines that the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84b is being executed, ends the series of processes, and returns to the original process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S352 that the value N2 of the held ball number counter is “4” or more (NO), and if it is determined in step S350 that no game ball has been won in the start winning opening 84b ( In each case of NO), a series of processing is terminated and the original processing is restored.

Next, the startup process will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by main controller 162.

The start-up process is a process activated when the power is turned on, and when executed in the MPU 310, the process proceeds to step S400 as shown in FIG.

In step S400, an initial setting associated with power-on is performed. In the initial setting, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer.

Next, the process proceeds to step S402, where the payout control device 242 and the sound lamp control device 14 are used.
3 and the display control device 302 are in a standby state until they become operable. When it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 1 [s]) has elapsed, and when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES) Is
The process proceeds to step S404.

In step S404, access to the RAM 314 is permitted, the process proceeds to step S406, and it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 247 is turned off. If it is determined that the RAM erase switch 247 is turned off ( YES), the process proceeds to step S408.

In step S408, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is turned on. If it is determined that the power failure flag is turned on (YES), it is determined that a power interruption has occurred, and step S4 is performed.
The process proceeds to 10 to calculate a RAM determination value. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, RAM 3
14 is a checksum value or hash value of data in the stack area and the work area.

Next, the process proceeds to step S412 to determine the validity of the backup by determining whether or not the calculated RAM determination value is normal, and the RAM determination value is normal (that is, the calculated RAM determination value is If it is determined that it matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off (YES), the process proceeds to step S414. Here, instead of the RAM determination value, the RAM 31
The validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area 4 is correctly stored.

In step S414, the power failure flag is turned off, the process proceeds to step S416, and a payout return command for designating that the payout control device 242 is returned to the power-off state is transmitted to the payout control device 242, and step S418 is performed. , Set interrupt permission, and move to main processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S412 that the RAM determination value is not normal (that is, the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off) (NO), the backed up RAM 314 data is destroyed. Step S42
Move to 0.

In step S420, the used area of the RAM 314 is cleared to “0”, and step S42.
2, the RAM 314 is initialized, the process proceeds to step S424, a payout initialization command for designating the initialization of the payout control apparatus 242 is transmitted to the payout control apparatus 242, and the process proceeds to step S418. .

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that the power failure flag is off (NO), it is determined that the power is not shut off, and the process proceeds to step S420.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S406 that the RAM erase switch 247 is on (NO), the process proceeds to step S420.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO), the process waits in step S402 until the predetermined time has elapsed.

Next, the main process will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main controller 162.

The main process is a process for performing main control of the main controller 162. As an outline, the processes of steps S500 to S512, S530, S532, and S514 to S520 are performed in a predetermined cycle (
For example, in 4 [ms]), steps S500 to S512, S in one period of a predetermined cycle
The processes in steps S518 and S520 are repeatedly executed using the remaining time required for the processes in 530, S532, S514, and S516. When the main process is executed in the MPU 310, the process proceeds to step S500 as shown in FIG.

In step S500, external output processing for transmitting the command set in the command buffer of the RAM 314 to the external terminal board 213, the payout control device 242, the power source and firing control device 243, or the sound lamp control device 143 is executed. Specifically, based on the detection information of the RAM 314, the winning to the start winning opening 84a and the like is determined, and when it is determined that there is a winning,
A prize ball command for designating prize ball payout is transmitted to the payout control device 242. When a game ball is to be launched, a launch command for designating the launch of the game ball is transmitted to the power supply and launch control device 243. Further, the voice lamp control device 14 gives commands for performing variation control of the game, such as a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a confirmation command, a pre-read command, and the like.
3 to send.

Next, the process proceeds to step S502, and the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS is updated. Specifically, “1” is added to the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS, and “0” is set when the maximum value is exceeded. Then, the update value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS is stored in the counter buffer.

Next, the process proceeds to step S504, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 242 are read, and the process proceeds to step S506, where the effect symbol display device 91 performs a variable display of the effect symbols. A control process is performed and it transfers to step S508.

In step S508, a big prize opening / closing process for opening or closing the big prize opening 83a is executed when a big hit has occurred. In the big prize opening / closing process, when a round is started in the big hit, the big prize opening 83a is opened and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 29 [s] has elapsed or nine game balls have won). If it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special winning opening 83a is closed. This opening and closing is repeated as long as the round continues with the maximum number of rounds as the upper limit.

Next, the process proceeds to step S510, and the normal symbol control process for variably displaying the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 94 is executed. In the normal symbol control process, when the game ball passes through the through gate 85, the value of the normal lottery random number counter C4 is acquired at the passing timing, and the display unit 94a
To start the display of normal symbols. Then, a normal lottery is performed based on the acquired random number counter value, and when it is a win, a game ball is won at the start winning opening 84b by releasing a movable piece that makes it difficult to win the start winning opening 84b at normal times. Form a state that is easy to do. The movable piece is opened for a predetermined time.

Next, the process proceeds to step S512, and a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In the launch control process, based on the detection information in the RAM 314, it is determined whether or not the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41 and whether or not a launch stop switch (not shown) is turned off. When it is determined that the handle 41 is touched and the firing stop switch is turned off, the firing command is set in the command buffer of the RAM 314. As a result, in the external output process in step S500, a firing command is transmitted to the power supply and launch control device 243 via the output port 318.

Next, the process proceeds to step S530, the prefetch process 1 corresponding to the start winning opening 84a is executed, the process proceeds to step S532, the prefetch process 2 corresponding to the start winning opening 84b is executed, and the process proceeds to step S514. To do.

In step S514, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is turned off. If it is determined that the power failure flag is turned off (YES), it is determined that the power is not shut off and the process proceeds to step S516. When it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 4 [ms]) has elapsed since the execution of the process of step S500 is started, and when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (YES) Proceeds to step S518.

In step S518, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second
“1” is added to each value of the initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the maximum value is exceeded, each value is set to “0”. The updated values are stored in the counter buffer.

Next, the process proceeds to step S520, and the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS is updated. Specifically, “1” is added to the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS, and “0” is set when the maximum value is exceeded. Then, the update value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS is stored in the counter buffer.

When the process of step S520 ends, the process proceeds to step S514. Step S50
Since the time required for the processing from 0 to S512, S530, and S532 varies depending on the gaming state, the number of executions of the random number update processing in steps S518 and S520 also varies depending on the gaming state. Therefore, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2
Since the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS can be updated irregularly, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S516 that the predetermined time has elapsed (NO), step S5
Shift to 00.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S514 that the power failure flag is turned on (NO), it is determined that the power interruption has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S522 to execute the power interruption process.
The process of step S514 is executed at the end of the processes of steps S500 to S512, S530, and S532, or at the end of the processes of steps S518 and S520. Therefore, since the power-off process is performed at the timing when each process is completed in the main process, it is not necessary to save the contents of the register of the MPU 310 in the stack area or store the value of the stack pointer in the power-off process. By setting a predetermined value for the stack pointer in the process of step S400, the process of step S500 can be started after the start-up process is completed. Therefore, the processing load on the main control device 162 can be reduced, and relatively stable control can be performed without causing the main control device 162 to malfunction or run away. In addition, since the power-off process is performed at the timing when each process is completed in the main process, the amount of information to be backed up in the RAM 314 can be reduced.

In step S522, interrupt prohibition is set, the process proceeds to step S524, a power-off command for designating power-off is transmitted to the payout control device 242 and the sound lamp control device 143, and the process proceeds to step S526.

In step S526, a RAM determination value is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the RAM 314.
Stored in a predetermined area. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value or hash value of data in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 314.

Next, the process proceeds to step S528, the access to the RAM 314 is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off.

Next, the symbol control process in step S506 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a symbol control process executed by the main controller 162.

The symbol control process is a process of displaying the variation of the effect symbol on the effect symbol display device 91. When the symbol control process is executed in step S506, the process proceeds to step S600 as shown in FIG.

In step S600, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit. If it is determined that the jackpot is not being hit (YES), the process proceeds to step S602. As the jackpot, it includes during the jackpot effect being performed by the effect symbol display device 91 and a predetermined time after the jackpot effect is ended.

Next, the process proceeds to step S602, where it is determined whether or not the special symbol display device 93 is currently performing variable display. If it is determined that variable display is not being performed (YES), the process proceeds to step S604.

In step S604, it is determined whether or not the value N2 of the retained ball number counter is larger than “0”. If it is determined that the value N2 of the retained ball number counter is larger than “0” (YES), step S606 is performed. Then, “1” is subtracted from the value N2 of the reserved ball number counter, and step S608 is performed.
Migrate to

In step S608, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading process flag 2 is on. If it is determined that the pre-reading process flag 2 is on (YES), the pre-reading of the start winning opening 84b is determined. It is determined that the effect process is being executed, and the process proceeds to step S610.

In step S610, the number of pre-reading reserved balls 2 is read from the RAM 314, "1" is subtracted from the read number of pre-reading reserved balls 2, and the subtracted pre-reading reserved number 2 is stored in the same area of the RAM 314. Migrate to

In step S612, it is determined whether or not the subtracted look-ahead reserved ball number 2 is “0”. If it is determined that the pre-read hold ball number 2 is “0” (YES), the process proceeds to step S614. Then, since it is not necessary to execute the prefetch process 2 in step S532, the prefetch process flag 2 is turned off,
The process proceeds to step S616.

In step S616, the random number counter value in the reserved ball storage area corresponding to the start winning opening 84b is shifted to the execution area side. Specifically, the random number counter value in the first reserved area is shifted to the execution area, and then the random number counter value in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area. Next, the random number counter value in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and then the random number counter value in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

Next, the process proceeds to step S618, and the variation start processing 2 for starting the variation display on the special symbol display device 93 is executed for the winning at the start winning opening 84b, the series of processing is terminated and the original processing is restored. .

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S612 that the number of pre-reading reserved balls 2 is not “0” (NO), the process proceeds to step S616.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S608 that the prefetching processing flag 2 is off (N
O) determines that the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84b is not being executed, and proceeds to step S616.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S604 that the value N2 of the reserved ball number counter is “0” or less (NO), the process proceeds to step S620.

In step S620, it is determined whether or not the value N1 of the retained ball number counter is greater than “0”. If it is determined that the value N1 of the retained ball number counter is greater than “0” (YES), step S622 is performed. Then, “1” is subtracted from the value N1 of the reserved ball number counter, and step S624 is performed.
Migrate to

In step S624, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading process flag 1 is turned on. If it is determined that the pre-reading process flag 1 is turned on (YES), the pre-reading of the start winning opening 84a is performed. It is determined that the effect process is being executed, and the process proceeds to step S626.

In step S626, the number of pre-reading reserved balls 1 is read from the RAM 314, "1" is subtracted from the read number of pre-reading reserved balls 1, and the subtracted pre-reading reserved number 1 is stored in the same area of the RAM 314. Migrate to

In step S628, it is determined whether or not the subtracted pre-reading pending ball number 1 is “0”. If it is determined that the pre-reading held ball number 1 is “0” (YES), the process proceeds to step S630. Then, since it is not necessary to execute the prefetch process 1 in step S530, the prefetch process flag 1 is turned off,
The process moves to step S632.

In step S632, as in the process of step S616, the random number counter value in the reserved ball storage area corresponding to the start winning opening 84a is shifted to the execution area side, and the process proceeds to step S634 to determine the winning in the starting winning opening 84a. Then, the fluctuation start process 1 for starting the fluctuation display on the special symbol display device 93 is executed, and a series of processes are ended to return to the original process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S628 that the pre-reading suspended ball count 1 is not “0” (NO), the process proceeds to step S632.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S624 that the prefetching processing flag 1 is off (N
O) determines that the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84a is not being executed, and proceeds to step S632.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S620 that the value N1 of the reserved ball number counter is equal to or less than “0” (NO), the series of processes is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S602 that the special symbol display device 93 is currently performing variable display (NO), the process proceeds to step S636, and the variable symbol display time of the special symbol display device 93 has elapsed. If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Y
ES) proceeds to step S638.

In step S638, the display of the special symbol display device 93 is updated. Specifically, LED
The display mode in which the LED 93a that is currently lit is red and the green LED 93a is turned on and the green LED 93a is turned on, for example, when the LED 93a that is currently lit is red. Set. If the LED 93a that is currently lit is green, the display mode is set so that the green LED 93a is turned off and the blue LED 93a is turned on. When the LED 93a that is currently lit is blue, a display mode is set in which the blue LED 93a is turned off and the red LED 93a is turned on.
Note that the process of step S638 is executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 [ms]). However, if the lighting color of the LED 93a is changed for each execution, the player cannot visually recognize the change in the lighting color of the LED 93a. . Therefore, in order to make the player visually recognize the change in the lighting color of the LED 93a, the process of step S638 adds “1” to the value of the counter (not shown) every time it is executed, and the counter value is a predetermined value (for example, When “100”) is exceeded, the lighting color of the LED 93a is changed, and LE is played at a period (for example, 4 [ms] × 100 = 0.4 [s]) that the player can visually recognize.
It is preferable to change the lighting color of D93a. The counter value returns to “0” when the lighting color of the LED 93a is changed.

When the process of step S638 ends, the series of processes ends and the original process is restored.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S636 that the variation time has elapsed for the variation display of the special symbol display device 93 (NO), the process proceeds to step S640 and the special symbol display device 93 is set to stop display. In the jackpot lottery, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and if it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot type random number counter C
Based on the value of 2, the type of jackpot and the type of stop symbol at the time of jackpot are determined. In step S640, the stop display of the special symbol display device 93 is set so that the display mode corresponds to the determined type of stop symbol at the time of the big hit. For example, the green LED 93a is lit when it is a non-probable big hit, the red LED 93a is lit when it is a probable big hit, and the blue LED 93a is lit when it is off. In addition, although the display of each LED 93a is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

Next, the process proceeds to step S642, and the stop display of the effect symbol display device 91 is indicated by the LED 93.
In order to synchronize with the lighting of a, a confirmation command is set in the command buffer of the RAM 314. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, the confirmation command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 via the output port 318. Also, a display time (for example, 1 [s]) for continuing to display the effect symbol after the effect symbol is displayed is determined, and the next variable display is waited for until the display time elapses.

When the process of step S642 ends, the series of processes ends and the original process is restored.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S600 that the game is currently a big hit (NO), the series of processes is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

Next, the fluctuation start process 1 in step S634 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process 1 executed by the main controller 162.

The variation start process 1 is a process of starting the variation display on the special symbol display device 93 for the winning at the start winning opening 84a. When the variation start process 1 is executed in step S634, the process proceeds to step S700 as shown in FIG. To do.

In step S700, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is determined by comparing the acquired random number counter value with the jackpot value (jackpot If it is determined that it is a big hit (YES)
) Proceeds to step S702.

In step S702, the value of the jackpot type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and the jackpot type is determined based on the acquired random number counter value (jacket type lottery). Based on, the display mode of the special symbol display device 93 and the stop symbol type of the effect symbol at the time of the big hit are determined.

Next, the process proceeds to step S704, and the variation pattern table 40 corresponding to the jackpot.
6 is read out. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area is acquired, and the jackpot, the determined jackpot type, the value N of the holding ball counter
1 and the address of the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the acquired random number counter value are acquired from the distribution structure table 404, and the variation pattern table 4 is obtained based on the acquired address.
Read 06.

Next, the process proceeds to step S706, where the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and the read fluctuation pattern table 406 is read out.
Read out the variation pattern number from the record of the rank of the obtained random number counter value,
A variation pattern at the time of jackpot specified by the read variation pattern number is determined. Further, the variation time is determined for the variation display of the special symbol display device 93, and the effect symbol display device 91 is determined.
The time until the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is determined. The fluctuation time uniquely corresponds to the fluctuation pattern. As a specific method of determining the fluctuation time, the values of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area are acquired. Based on the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3, a rough change time such as normal reach, super reach, and special reach is determined, and the final stop is performed after the reach effect based on the value of the acquired change pattern random number counter CS. The variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the symbol (medium symbol) is stopped and displayed is determined. Note that the variation time can be set using only the value of the reach random number counter C3 without using the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS. Whether to set each value of the counter C3 and the variation pattern random number counter CS,
It can be appropriately determined according to the value of the reach random number counter C3, the gaming state, and the like.

Next, the process proceeds to step S708, and a variation pattern command for designating the variation pattern determined in steps S706, S718, and S724 is set in the command buffer of the RAM 314. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, the output port 31 is set.
8, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143.

Next, the process proceeds to step S710, and a stop type command for designating the type of stop symbol determined in steps S702, S714, and S720 is set in the command buffer of the RAM 314. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, the output port 318 is displayed.
The stop type command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 via. Step S500
In the external output process, commands are sent in the order in which they are set in the command buffer.
The variation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted in that order.

When the process of step S710 ends, the series of processes ends and returns to the original process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S700 that it is not a big hit (NO), step S712 is performed.
The jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area
If it is determined that it is a small hit (lottery lottery) by comparing the acquired random number counter value and the small hit value, and if it is determined that it is a small hit (YES) The process proceeds to step S714.

Next, the process proceeds to step S714, and the display mode of the special symbol display device 93 and the stop symbol type of the effect symbol at the time of the small hit are determined.

Next, the process proceeds to step S716, and the variation pattern table 40 corresponding to the small hits is obtained.
6 is read out. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the small hit, the value N1 of the reserved ball number counter and the acquired random number counter value is obtained. Are obtained from the distribution structure table 404, and the variation pattern table 406 is read based on the obtained address.

Next, the process proceeds to step S718, where the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and the read fluctuation pattern table 406 is read out.
Read out the variation pattern number from the record of the rank of the obtained random number counter value,
A variation pattern at the time of a small hit specified by the read variation pattern number is determined. At this time, the variation time is determined for the variation display of the special symbol display device 93, and the variation time until the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed by the effect symbol display device 91 is determined. Specifically, each value of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and each value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS is obtained. Based on this, the fluctuation time for normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc. is determined. Then, the variation pattern is determined based on the determined variation time. Note that the fluctuation time is determined by using the reach random number counter C3 without using the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS.
It is also possible to set using only the value of the reach random number counter C3 or whether to set with the values of the reach random number counter C3 and the variation pattern random number counter CS each time the reach is set. It can be appropriately determined according to the value of the random number counter C3, the gaming state, and the like.

When the process of step S718 ends, the process proceeds to step S708.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S712 that it is not a small hit (NO), step S720
Then, the display mode of the special symbol display device 93 at the time of detachment and the stop symbol type of the effect symbol are determined.

Next, the process proceeds to step S722, and the fluctuation pattern table 406 corresponding to the deviation is read. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and the value of the change pattern table 406 corresponding to the value N1 of the reserved ball number counter and the acquired random number counter value is removed. An address is acquired from the distribution structure table 404, and the variation pattern table 406 is read based on the acquired address.

Next, the process proceeds to step S724, where the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and the read fluctuation pattern table 406 is read out.
Read out the variation pattern number from the record of the rank of the obtained random number counter value,
The fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation specified by the read fluctuation pattern number is determined. At this time, the variation time is determined for the variation display of the special symbol display device 93, and the effect symbol display device 91 is determined.
To determine the fluctuation time until the off symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation pattern random number counter C stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area
Each value of S is acquired, and the acquired reach random number counter C3 and fluctuation pattern random number counter C
Based on each value of S, the fluctuation time of normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc. is determined. Then, the variation pattern is determined based on the determined variation time. Note that the variation time can be set using only the value of the reach random number counter C3 without using the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS. Whether to set each value of the counter C3 and the variation pattern random number counter CS can be appropriately determined according to the value of the reach random number counter C3, the gaming state, and the like each time.

In addition, although the process of step S720-S724 is not shown in figure, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area is acquired, and reach effect is performed based on the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3. It is determined whether or not to perform, and based on the result. Specifically, if it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed, step S72 is performed for the reach failure.
The process from 0 to S724 is executed. On the other hand, if you decide not to perform reach production,
Steps S720 to S724 are executed for non-reaching. Step S
The same applies to the processing of 822, S824, S872, and S874.

When the process of step S724 ends, the process proceeds to step S708.
Note that the fluctuation start process 2 is the same as the fluctuation start process 1, and thus the description thereof is omitted.
The difference from the variation start process 1 is that it is a process for winning to the start winning opening 84b and the value N2 of the reserved ball number counter is used. The value N2 of the reserved ball number counter is used in processes corresponding to steps S704, S716, and S722.

Next, the prefetch process 1 of step S530 is demonstrated.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the prefetch process 1 executed by the main controller 162.

The prefetch process 1 is a process subsequent to the processes of steps S308 to S314 in the prefetch effect process of the start winning opening 84a. When executed in step S530, the process proceeds to step S800 as shown in FIG. To do.

In step S800, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading process flag 1 is on. If it is determined that the pre-reading process flag 1 is on (YES), the pre-reading of the start winning opening 84a is performed. It is determined that the effect process is being executed, the process proceeds to step S802, the prefetch determination value 1 and the prefetch pending ball count 1 are read from the RAM 314, and the process proceeds to step S804.

In step S804, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is acquired from the read prefetch determination value 1, and it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot by comparing the acquired random number counter value with the jackpot value (prefetch effect lottery 1 If it is determined that it is a big hit (YES), step S
Move to 806.

In step S806, similarly to the process in step S704, the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the jackpot is read, and the process proceeds to step S808, and in the same manner as the process in step S706, the jackpot hour is determined based on the read variation pattern table 406. The variation pattern is determined, and the process proceeds to step S810.

In step S810, a prefetch command for designating the variation pattern determined in steps S808, S820, and S824 and the number of prefetch pending balls 1 read is set in the command buffer of the RAM 314. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, a prefetch command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 via the output port 318.

Next, the process proceeds to step S812, where the prefetch determination value 1 and the prefetch hold ball number 1 are stored in the RAM 3
14 is cleared, the process proceeds to step S814, the pre-reading process flag 1 is turned off, the series of processes is terminated, and the process returns to the original process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S804 that it is not a big hit (NO), step S816 is performed.
And the value of the big hit random number counter C1 is acquired from the read prefetch determination value 1, and the obtained random number counter value is compared with the small hit value to determine whether or not the small hit is determined. When it is determined that it is a win (YES), the process proceeds to step S818.

In step S818, as in the process of step S716, the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the small hit is read, and the process proceeds to step S820, and in the same manner as in the process of step S718, the small hit is based on the read variation pattern table 406. The time variation pattern is determined, and the process proceeds to step S810.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S816 that it is not a small hit (NO), step S822 is performed.
As in the process of step S722, the variation pattern table 4 corresponding to the deviation is transferred to
06 is read, and the process proceeds to step S824, and in the same manner as the process in step S724, a deviation variation pattern is determined based on the read variation pattern table 406, and the process proceeds to step S810.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S800 that the prefetching processing flag 1 is off (N
O) determines that the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84a is not being executed, ends the series of processes, and returns to the original process.

Next, the prefetch process 2 of step S532 is demonstrated.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing prefetching processing 2 executed by main controller 162.

The prefetch process 2 is a process subsequent to the processes of steps S358 to S364 in the prefetch effect process of the start winning opening 84b, and when executed in step S532, the process proceeds to step S850 as shown in FIG. To do.

In step S850, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading process flag 2 is on. If it is determined that the pre-reading process flag 2 is on (YES), the pre-reading of the start winning opening 84b is determined. It is determined that the effect process is being executed, the process proceeds to step S852, the prefetch determination value 2 and the prefetch pending ball count 2 are read from the RAM 314, and the process proceeds to step S854.

In step S854, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is acquired from the read prefetch determination value 2, and it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot by comparing the acquired random number counter value with the jackpot value (prefetch effect lottery 2 If it is determined that it is a big hit (YES), step S
856.

In step S856, similarly to the process in step S704, the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the jackpot is read out, and the process proceeds to step S858, and in the same manner as the process in step S706, the jackpot hour is determined based on the read variation pattern table 406. The variation pattern is determined, and the process proceeds to step S860.

In step S860, a prefetch command for designating the variation pattern determined in steps S858, S870, and S874 and the number of read prefetch pending balls 2 is set in the command buffer of the RAM 314. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, a prefetch command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 via the output port 318.

Next, the process proceeds to step S862, where the prefetch determination value 2 and the prefetch hold ball number 2 are stored in the RAM 3
14 is cleared, the process proceeds to step S864, the pre-reading processing flag 2 is turned off, a series of processes are terminated, and the process returns to the original process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S854 that it is not a big hit (NO), step S866 is performed.
The value of the big hit random number counter C1 is acquired from the read prefetch determination value 2, and it is determined whether or not it is a small hit by comparing the acquired random number counter value with the small hit value. When it is determined that it is a win (YES), the process proceeds to step S868.

In step S868, similarly to the process in step S716, the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the small hit is read, and the process proceeds to step S870, and in the same manner as the process in step S718, the small hit is based on the read variation pattern table 406. The time variation pattern is determined, and the process proceeds to step S860.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S866 that there is no small hit (NO), step S872 is performed.
As in the process of step S722, the variation pattern table 4 corresponding to the deviation is transferred to
06 is read out, the process proceeds to step S874, and similarly to the process in step S724, the deviation variation pattern is determined based on the read variation pattern table 406, and the process proceeds to step S860.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S850 that the prefetching process flag 2 is off (N
O) determines that the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84b is not being executed, ends the series of processes, and returns to the original process.

Next, the configuration of the audio lamp control device 143 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the audio lamp control device 143.

As shown in FIG. 23, the audio lamp control device 143 includes an MPU 350 that is a one-chip type microprocessor such as DIP, an input port 356 for inputting data from the outside of the audio lamp control device 143, and the audio lamp control device 143. And an output port 358 for outputting data to the outside. The MPU 350, the input port 356 and the output port 358 are connected to each other via a bus 360.

The MPU 350 includes a ROM 352 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 350 and fixed value data, a RAM 354 that functions as a work area for storing various data when the control program is executed, an interrupt circuit, and a timer circuit. And various circuits such as a data transmission / reception circuit.

The RAM 354 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 350 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 350, and a work area (work for storing various flags, counters, I / O values, etc. Region).

The input port 356 is connected to the main control device 162, the operation buttons 35, and the like.
An audio output device 362, a lamp display device 364, a display control device 302, and the like are connected to the output port 358.

When the MPU 350 receives a command for performing audio output control of the audio output device 362 from the main control device 162 via the input port 356, the MPU 350 controls the audio output device 362 based on the received command. The audio output device 362 outputs audio from the speaker unit 26 under the control of the audio lamp control device 143.

When the MPU 350 receives a command for performing lamp display control of the lamp display device 364 from the main control device 162 via the input port 356, the MPU 350 controls the lamp display device 364 based on the received command. Under the control of the audio lamp control device 143, the lamp display device 364 turns on, turns off, or blinks the annular illumination unit 23, the error display lamp unit 24, the prize ball lamp unit 25, and the holding lamps 95a, 95b, 96.

When the MPU 350 receives a command for performing display control of the display control device 302 from the main control device 162 via the input port 356, the MPU 350 controls the display control device 302 based on the received command. The display control device 302 performs display control of the effect symbol display device 91 under the control of the sound lamp control device 143.

It should be noted that the command for controlling the voice output of the voice output device 362, the lamp display device 36.
The command for performing lamp display control 4 and the command for performing display control of the display control device 302 are, for example, one command (voice output control of the voice output device 362, lamp display device, such as a variation pattern command). 364 lamp display control and display control device 3
Command for performing display control of 02). In this case, MPU
350 controls the lamp display device 364, the display control device 302, and the display control device 302 based on the received command.

Next, processing executed by the audio lamp control device 143 will be described.
The MPU 350 activates a control program stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 352 and executes an audio lamp control process. The sound lamp control process is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

First, the startup process will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the sound lamp control device 143.

The start-up process is a process started when the power is turned on, and when executed in the MPU 350, the process proceeds to step S1100 as shown in FIG.

In step S1100, an initial setting associated with power-on is performed. In the initial setting, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1102, and in order to determine whether or not the current startup process is started during execution of the power-off process (described later: step S1230) due to an instantaneous voltage drop, If it is determined whether the power-off processing flag indicating whether or not the power is being shut down during processing is off, and if it is determined that the power-off processing flag is off (YES) Then, it is determined that the power is not shut off during the power-off process, and the process proceeds to step S1104. If the power-off processing flag is off, this start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred, the execution of the power-off processing is completed Or the MPU 350 is reset only due to the influence of noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 162).

In step S1104, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 354 has been destroyed.
The determination of data destruction is performed as follows. In a specific area of the RAM 354, a predetermined value (for example, “55AAh”) is written as RAM destruction check data (described later: step S1110). Therefore, if data is read from a specific area of the RAM 354 and the read data matches a predetermined value, it can be determined that the data in the RAM 354 is not destroyed. On the other hand, if the read data does not match the predetermined value, the RAM 3
It can be determined that 54 data has been destroyed.

If this startup process is started after the power supply is completely shut down,
Since the RAM destruction check data is not stored in the specific area 354 (since all data in the RAM 354 is cleared by power-off), it is determined that the data in the RAM 354 is destroyed.

On the other hand, when this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process, or when the MPU 350 is reset only due to the influence of noise, etc. Since the RAM destruction check data is stored in the specific area of the RAM 354, it is determined that the data of the RAM 354 is not destroyed.

As a result of the determination in step S1104, when it is determined that the data in the RAM 354 has been destroyed (YES), the process proceeds to step S1106, and all areas of the RAM 354 are inspected. As an inspection method, first, “FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to determine whether it is “FFh”. If “FFh”, “FFh” is inspected. Determines that the RAM 354 is normal. This writing and determination for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “AAh”, and “00h” after “FFh”. By this inspection, all areas of the RAM 354 are cleared to “0”.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1108, where the result of inspection in step S1106 is RAM.
It is determined whether or not 354 is normal, and “FFh”, “55h”, “AAh”, “00h”
If it is determined that the RAM 354 is normal for all of the inspections, it is determined that the RAM 354 is normal. In that case (YES), the process proceeds to step S1110 and the RAM destruction check data (for example, “55AAh”). Is written in the specific area of the RAM 354, and the process proceeds to step S1112.

In step S1112, it is determined whether or not a power-off flag indicating whether or not power-off processing has been executed is on. Since the power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is executed,
The process of step S1112 is reached when the power-off flag is on when the startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure and after the power-off process is executed. is there.

If it is determined in step S1112 that the power-off flag is turned on (YES), it is determined that the power-off processing has been executed, and the process proceeds to step S1114, where the sound lamp control device 14
In order to initialize each process of No. 3, the work area of the RAM 354 is cleared to “0”. Here, the work area of the RAM 354 refers to an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main controller 162. Note that the power-off flag is also turned off by the processing in step S1114.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1116, where the initial setting of the RAM 354 is performed.
The process proceeds to 1118, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1112 that the power-off flag is off (NO), it is determined that the power-off process is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S1116. The reason why the process of step S1112 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is off is that the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, steps S1106 to S11.
This is a case where the process of step S1112 is reached via the process of No. 10, or only the MPU 350 is reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 162) due to the influence of noise or the like. . In this case, the process of step S1114 is not executed via the processes of steps S1106 to S1110.
If the process of step 2 is reached, all the areas of the RAM 354 have already been cleared by the process of step S1106, and the start-up process is started by resetting only the MPU 350 due to noise or the like. This is because the control of the sound lamp control device 143 can be continued by maintaining the work area of the RAM 354 without clearing it.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1108 that the RAM 354 is not normal (NO), the process proceeds to step S1120, the error display lamp unit 24 notifies the abnormality of the RAM 354, and the infinite loop is executed until the power supply is completely shut off. continue. Note that the sound output device 362 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 354.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1104 that the data in the RAM 354 has not been destroyed (NO), the process proceeds to step S1112.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1102 that the power-off processing flag is on.
(NO) determines that the power is being cut off during the power-off process, and the process proceeds to step S1106. When the power-off process flag is on, this startup process is started after a momentary power failure and the MPU 350 is reset during the power-off process. . In this case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 354 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control of the sound lamp control device 143 cannot be continued, the process proceeds to step S1106 and all areas of the RAM 354 are cleared.

Next, the main process will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the sound lamp control device 143.

The main process is a process for performing the main control of the sound lamp control device 143, and is the MPU 350.
If executed in step S1200, the process proceeds to step S1200 as shown in FIG.

In step S1200, a predetermined time (starting execution of the process of step S1200) (
For example, it is determined whether or not 1 [ms] has elapsed, and when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed (YES
) Proceeds to step S1202. In step S1200, it is determined whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed. Steps S1202 to S1214 are processing related to display, whereas it is not necessary to execute in a cycle shorter than the predetermined time (within 1 [ms]). Step S1216
This is because it is preferable to execute the fluctuation control process and the command reception process in step S1218 in a short cycle. Thereby, the reception omission of the command from the main controller 162 can be prevented.

In step S1202, the lighting pattern of the error display lamp unit 24 is set, and the outputs of the annular illumination unit 23 and the prize ball lamp unit 25 are set so as to be the lighting pattern set in the lamp setting process (described later: step S1210). To do.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1204, and a power-on notification process is executed. The power-on notification process is a process of notifying that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 [s]) when the power is turned on. The notification is performed by the audio output device 362 or the lamp display device 364. Do. In addition, a command for designating display of power supply on the effect symbol display device 91 may be transmitted to the display control device 302. If the power is not turned on, notification by the power-on notification process is not performed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1206, and when a demo command is received from the main control device 162 (described later: step S1218), the demonstration symbol display device 91 waits for a customer by transmitting the received demo command to the display control device 302. The customer waiting demonstration production process for starting the demonstration production is executed. In the customer waiting demonstration effect process, the voice output device 362 and the lamp display device 364 are controlled based on the received demonstration command. In the demo command, the number of held balls is “0”
”And the effect symbol display device 91 transmits the effect symbol variation display. The customer-waiting demonstration will be introduced to the customer-waiting demonstration without any sense of incongruity based on the current screen status without suddenly changing the screen status of the stop pattern, background, character, effect, etc. The contents are set. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable even when the customer waiting demonstration effect is started during the game.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1208, where it is determined whether or not the operation button 35 has been pressed. If it is determined that the operation button 35 has been pressed, the effect symbol display device 91 causes the button effect accompanying the pressing of the operation button 35. The operation button monitoring process is performed. In the operation button monitoring process, for example, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the operation button 35 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation display, or the operation button 35 is pressed during the reach effect. By pressing it down, it can be changed to an effect that improves the expectation of jackpot.
The operation button 35 can also be used as a button for determining one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. If the operation button 35 is not provided on the pachinko machine 10, the process of step S1208 is omitted.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1210, and lamp setting processing for setting lighting patterns of the annular illumination part 23 and the prize ball lamp part 25 is executed so as to correspond to the display of the effect symbol display device 91.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1212 where the sound output pattern of the sound output device 362 is set so as to correspond to the display of the effect symbol display device 91, and the sound output from the sound output device 362 with the set sound output pattern. Execute the setting process.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1214, and when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 162 (described later: step S1218), it is synchronized with the time required for the variation display of the effect symbol display device 91 based on the received variation pattern command. A liquid crystal effect execution management process for setting the set time is executed. Based on this set time, the production time of the processing of steps S1210 and S1212 is set.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1216, where the variation pattern command, the stop type command,
The main control device 1 receives commands for confirming commands, prefetching commands and other game effects.
When received from 62 (described later: step S1218), the received variation pattern command, stop type command, confirmation command, pre-read command, and other commands for effect control of the game are transmitted to the display control device 302. A variation control process for controlling the variation display of the symbol display device 91 is executed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1218, where a command is received from the main control device 162, a received command is determined, and command reception processing for performing necessary processing such as flag setting is executed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1220, and it is determined whether or not a power failure flag indicating whether or not a power interruption has occurred is turned off. The power failure flag is turned on when a power-off command is received from the main controller 162.

If it is determined in step S1220 that the power failure flag is off (YES), it is determined that the power is not shut off, the process proceeds to step S1222, and the data stored in the RAM 354 is the same as the process in step S1104. Is determined to be destroyed, and if it is determined that the data in the RAM 354 is destroyed (YES), the process proceeds to step S1224.

In step S1224, the error display lamp unit 24 notifies the abnormality of the RAM 354, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off. Note that the sound output device 362 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 354.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1222 that the data in the RAM 354 has not been destroyed (NO), the process proceeds to step S1200.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1220 that the power failure flag is on (NO),
It is determined that the power has been cut off, and the process proceeds to step S1226 in order to execute a power-off process (described later: step S1228). The process of step S1220 is performed by the audio lamp control device 1
It is executed at the end of one cycle of 43 main processes. Therefore, since the power-off process is performed at the timing when each process is completed in the main process, the MPU 3
Even if the contents of the 50 registers are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, by setting a predetermined value in the stack pointer in the process of step S1100, The process can be started from step S1200. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the sound lamp control device 143 and to perform relatively stable control without causing the sound lamp control device 143 to malfunction or run away.

In step S1226, the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on, and the process proceeds to step S1228 to execute the power-off process. In power-off processing, set interrupt prohibition,
The outputs of the audio output device 362 and the lamp display device 364 are turned off, and the power failure flag is turned off.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1230, the power-off processing flag is turned off, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off.

On the other hand, when it determines with predetermined time not having passed by step S1200 (NO), it transfers to step S1216.

Next, the configuration of the display control device 302 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the display control device 302.

As shown in FIG. 26, the display control device 302 includes an MPU 370 that is a microprocessor.
And a program ROM 372 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 370 and fixed value data, and a work RAM 374 functioning as a work area for storing various data when executing the control program. ing.

The display control device 302 further includes an image controller (VDP (Video Display Processor)) 376 that performs drawing processing on the effect symbol display device 91 and a direct memory access control DMAC that transfers data from the work RAM 374 to the image controller 376.
r) 378 and an input port 380 for inputting data from the outside of the display control device 302. The MPU 370, program ROM 372, work RAM 374, image controller 376, DMAC 378, and input port 380 are connected to each other via a bus 382.

The display control device 302 further includes a character ROM 384 that stores background data, symbol data, character data, effect data, and the like, a video RAM 386 for storing display data to be output to the effect symbol display device 91, and the display control device 302. And an output port 388 for outputting data to the outside. The image controller 376 and the output port 388 are connected to each other via a bus 390.

An audio lamp control device 143 and the like are connected to the input port 380.
An effect symbol display device 91 and the like are connected to the output port 388.

Note that the pachinko machine 10 is a different model that has the same design as that displayed on the effect symbol display device 91 even if it is a different model with different winning probabilities for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 302 is made as a common part to reduce the cost.

When the MPU 370 receives a command from the sound lamp control device 143 via the input port 380, the MPU 370 performs display control of the effect symbol display device 91 based on the received command.

The work RAM 374 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 370, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 370, and the like, and the work area (values of various flags, counters, I / Os, etc.). Working area).

The work RAM 374 is provided with a counter buffer, similar to the RAM 314. The counter buffer stores the value of the stop symbol random number counter for determining the stop symbol. The stop symbol random number counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is stored in the counter buffer.

Next, the data structure of the program ROM 372 will be described.
The program ROM 372 stores a plurality of effect data tables and a management table for managing time data and the address of the effect data table.

First, the data structure of the management table will be described.
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the data structure of the variation pattern command management table 408.

As shown in FIG. 27, the fluctuation pattern command management table 408 is a management table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern command, and the fluctuation pattern command management table 408 includes:
Multiple records are registered. Each record includes a field for registering a variation pattern number, a field for registering time data indicating a variation time for variation display performed by the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern number, and an address of the effect data table identified by the variation pattern And a field for registering.

In the example of FIG. 27, “0” is registered as the variation pattern number, “5” is registered as the time data, and “Table 1” is registered as the address of the effect data table in the first record. This indicates that, when a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number “0” is received, variation display with variation time of 5 [s] is performed using the effect data table 1.

As the management table, not only the variation pattern command management table 408,
There is a management table corresponding to a confirmed command (hereinafter referred to as a confirmed command management table). The confirmed command management table also has a data structure similar to that of the variation pattern command management table 408.

Next, the data structure of the effect data table will be described.
FIG. 28 shows the data structure of the effect data table 410. As shown in FIG.

In the effect data table 410, as shown in FIG. 28, a plurality of effect data for realizing one change display, stop display, customer waiting demonstration effect and other effects are registered in time series in the effect symbol display device 91. ing. START data indicating the start of effect data is registered in the first record, and END data indicating the end of effect data is registered in the last record. The effect data is registered in a record between the START data and the END data. In each record, a symbol position, a background type, a character type, an effect, and the like are registered as effect data.

The effect data table 410 used for the effect is read from the program ROM 372 and set in the table buffer of the work RAM 374. In the initial state set in the table buffer, a pointer is set at the first record of the effect data table 410. Then, while adding the pointer by “1”, the effect data of the record pointed to by the pointer is sequentially acquired, and display control of the effect symbol display device 91 is performed based on the acquired effect data.

The program ROM 372 further stores a plurality of stop symbol tables and a stop symbol management table for managing the addresses of the stop symbol tables.

First, the data structure of the stop symbol management table will be described.
FIG. 29 shows the data structure of the stop symbol management table 412. As shown in FIG.

A plurality of records are registered in the stop symbol management table 412 as shown in FIG. Each record includes a field for registering a stop type number indicating the type of stop symbol and a field for registering an address of the stop symbol table.

In the example of FIG. 29, “0” is registered as the stop type number and “Table 1” is registered as the stop symbol table address in the first record. This indicates that when the stop type command corresponding to the stop type number “0” is received, the stop symbol is determined using the stop symbol table 1.

Next, the data structure of the stop symbol table will be described.
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the data structure of the stop symbol table 414.

In the stop symbol table 414, as shown in FIG. 30, a plurality of records are registered corresponding to the numerical range of the stop symbol random number counter. Each record includes a field for registering a stop symbol number indicating a stop symbol. Get the value of the stop symbol random number counter
The stop symbol number is read from the record of the rank of the acquired random number counter value, and the stop symbol specified by the read stop symbol number is determined. For example, when the random number counter value is “30”, the stop symbol number is read from the 30th record. In the example of FIG. 30, since “127” is read from the stop symbol table 414, the right symbol is “1”, the middle symbol is “2”,
It is determined that the left symbol is “7”. In addition, in the example of FIG. 30, the stop symbol table 414 for determining the stop symbol at the time of non-reach out is shown, but the non-probable big hit, the probable big hit, the JUB big hit, the sudden big hit, the latent big hit Similarly, the stop symbol table for determining the stop symbol at the time of small hit and unreach is also the program R
It is stored in the OM 372.

Next, the configuration of the image controller 376 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the image controller 376.

FIG. 31A shows the first frame buffer 386a for drawing and the second frame buffer 38.
FIG. 31 (b) shows a case where the first frame buffer 386a is set for output and the second frame buffer 386b is set for drawing, respectively.

Display data generated by the rendering process of the image controller 376 is written into the video RAM 386. As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the video RAM 386 includes a first frame buffer 386a that is a storage area for storing display data corresponding to the size and resolution of one screen of the effect symbol display device 91, and First frame buffer 386
a second frame buffer 386b which is a storage area having the same storage capacity as a.

First, upon receiving drawing data from the DMAC 378, the image controller 376 reads necessary data from the character ROM 384 based on the received drawing data, and generates display data by performing rendering processing on the read data. Then
As shown in FIG. 31A, the first frame buffer 386a is set for drawing and the second frame buffer 386b is set for output. Then, drawing is performed by writing display data to the first frame buffer 386a for drawing. On the other hand, display is performed by outputting the display data written in the second frame buffer 386 b for output to the effect symbol display device 91. When drawing and display are completed, the MPU 370 receives V
Output an interrupt signal. Drawing and display are performed in a predetermined time (for example, 20 [ms]).

Next, when receiving drawing data from the DMAC 378, the image controller 376 reads necessary data from the character ROM 384 based on the received drawing data, and generates display data by performing rendering processing on the read data. Then
As shown in FIG. 31B, the first frame buffer 386a is set for output and the second frame buffer 386b is set for drawing. Then, drawing is performed by writing display data to the second frame buffer 386b for drawing. On the other hand, display is performed by outputting the display data written in the first frame buffer 386 a for output to the effect symbol display device 91. When drawing and display are completed, the MPU 370 receives V
Output an interrupt signal. Drawing and display are performed in a predetermined time (for example, 20 [ms]).

The image controller 376 repeats this alternately, while producing the effect symbol display device 91.
The drawing process for is performed. Note that the alternating repetition may be performed by the image controller 376 or by the control of the MPU 370.

Next, processing executed by the display control apparatus 302 will be described.
The MPU 370 activates a control program stored in a predetermined area of the program ROM 372 and executes display control processing. The display control process is roughly divided into a command interrupt process that is periodically activated, a V interrupt process that is activated by input of a V interrupt signal, and a main process.

First, command interrupt processing will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the display control device 302.

The command interrupt process is a process executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 [ms]), and MP
When executed in U370, the process moves to step S1300 as shown in FIG.
Note that the command interrupt process may be configured not as a timer interrupt but as a process activated when a command strobe signal is received.

In step S1300, it is determined whether a command has been received from the audio lamp control device 143. If it is determined that a command has been received (YES), the process proceeds to step S1302.

In step S1302, the received command is stored in the ring buffer. The ring buffer is a storage area logically configured in a ring shape. In the initial state, an input pointer and a read pointer are set at the beginning of the ring buffer.

In the case of storing a command, when the command is received, the command is stored in a 2-byte area indicated by the input pointer. Then, by adding “1” to the input pointer, the input pointer moves by one to the end side of the ring buffer. When a command is stored in the end region of the ring buffer, the input pointer is set again at the start end of the ring buffer.

On the other hand, when reading a command, the command is read from the 2-byte area indicated by the read pointer. Then, by adding “1” to the read pointer, the read pointer moves by one to the end side of the ring buffer. When a command is read from the end region of the ring buffer, the read pointer is set again at the start end of the ring buffer.
The read pointer is not set ahead of the input pointer, but is set at the same position as the input pointer or behind it. When the position is the same as the input pointer, it means that all the commands in the ring buffer have been processed in the command determination process (described later: step S1400). If it is located behind the input pointer, it means that an unprocessed new command exists in the ring buffer.

The moving unit of the input pointer and the read pointer may be 1 byte. That is, a 2-byte command may be input byte by byte and read byte by byte.

When the process of step S1302 ends, the series of processes ends and returns to the original process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1300 that the command is not received (NO), the series of processes is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

Next, the V interrupt process will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the display control device 302.

The V-interrupt process is started when a V-interrupt signal is input from the image controller 376. When executed in the MPU 370, as shown in FIG.
Shift to 00.

In step S1400, a command determination process for determining a command of the ring buffer is executed, the process proceeds to step S1402, a display setting process for performing display setting of the effect symbol display device 91 is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1404. A display execution process for executing display on the symbol display device 91 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, the stop symbol random number counter is updated. Specifically, “1” is added to the value of the stop symbol random number counter, and “0” is set when the maximum value is exceeded. Then, the updated value of the stop symbol random number counter is stored in the counter buffer.

When the process of step S1406 ends, the series of processes ends and the original process is restored.

Next, the command determination process in step S1400 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the display control apparatus 302.

The command determination process is a process for determining a command in the ring buffer.
When executed in 1400, the process moves to step S1500 as shown in FIG.

In step S1500, it is determined whether there is a new command in the ring buffer by determining whether the input pointer and the read pointer of the ring buffer are different.
If it is determined that a new command exists (YES), the process proceeds to step S1502.

In step S1502, a new command is read from the ring buffer. A command composed of 2 bytes such as a variation pattern command, a stop type command, or a confirmation command is read in units of 2 bytes. On the other hand, a command composed of 4 bytes such as a pre-read command is read in units of 4 bytes. However, if only the first 2-byte command among the commands composed of 4 bytes is stored in the link buffer, it waits until the remaining 2-byte command is stored. The case of reading a command composed of 6 bytes or more is the same as the case of reading a command composed of 4 bytes.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1504, where it is determined whether or not the new command read in step S1502 is a prefetch command. If it is determined that the new command is a prefetch command (YES), the process proceeds to step S1506. To do.

In step S1506, a prefetch command process for processing the prefetch command is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1504 that the new command is not a prefetch command (NO)
Shifts to step S1508 to determine whether or not the new command read in step S1502 is a variation pattern command. If it is determined that the new command is a variation pattern command (YES), the procedure proceeds to step S1510. To do.

In step S1510, a fluctuation pattern command process for processing a fluctuation pattern command is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1508 that the new command is not a variation pattern command (NO), the process proceeds to step S1512, where it is determined whether the new command read in step S1502 is a stop type command. If it is determined that the command is a stop type command (YES), the process proceeds to step S1514.

In step S1514, a stop type command process for processing a stop type command is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1512 that the new command is not a stop type command
(NO) moves to step S1516, it is determined whether or not the new command read in step S1502 is a confirmed command. If it is determined that the new command is a confirmed command (YES), the process proceeds to step S1518. Transition.

In step S1518, a confirmation command process for processing a confirmation command is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1516 that the new command is not a confirmed command (NO)
Shifts to step S1520, executes other command processing for processing other commands, ends a series of processing, and returns to the original processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1500 that there is no new command (NO), the series of processes is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

Next, the prefetch command process in step S1506 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing prefetch command processing executed by the display control device 302.

The prefetch command process is a process for processing a prefetch command. When the prefetch command process is executed in step S1506, the process proceeds to step S1600 as shown in FIG.

In step S1600, a prefetch command flag indicating whether or not a prefetch command has been received is turned on, the process proceeds to step S1602, a variation pattern is acquired from the received prefetch command, and the process proceeds to step S1604.

In step S1604, the number of prefetched reserved balls is acquired from the received prefetched command, and the process proceeds to step S1606 to set the retained ball number discrimination information indicating the acquired variation pattern and the number of prefetched reserved balls. To return to the original process.

Next, the fluctuation pattern command processing in step S1510 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the display control device 302.

The fluctuation pattern command process is a process for processing a fluctuation pattern command. When the fluctuation pattern command process is executed in step S1510, the process proceeds to step S1700 as shown in FIG.

In step S1700, the address of the effect data table 410 corresponding to the received change pattern command is acquired from the change pattern command management table 408, the effect data table 410 is read from the program ROM 372 based on the acquired address, and the process proceeds to step S1702. .

In step S1702, the read effect data table 410 is stored in the work RAM 374.
In step S1704, the time data corresponding to the received variation pattern command is acquired from the variation pattern command management table 408, and the variation time is set for the variation display of the effect symbol display device 91. Then, a time counter is set based on the acquired time data, a series of processing is terminated, and the original processing is restored.

Next, the stop type command process in step S1514 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the display control apparatus 302.

The stop type command process is a process for processing a stop type command, and includes step S15.
If it is executed at step 14, the process proceeds to step S1800 as shown in FIG.

In step S1800, the stop symbol table 41 corresponding to the received stop type command.
4 is acquired from the stop symbol management table 412, and the stop symbol table 414 is read from the program ROM 372 based on the acquired address, and the process proceeds to step S1802.

In step S1802, the value of the stop symbol random number counter is acquired, and in the read stop symbol table 414, the stop symbol number is read from the record of the rank of the acquired random number counter value, and the stop symbol specified by the read stop symbol number is displayed. Determine, end a series of processing and return to the original processing.

Next, the confirmation command process in step S1518 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a confirmation command process executed by the display control device 302.

The confirmation command process is a process for processing a confirmation command. When the confirmation command process is executed in step S1518, the process proceeds to step S2000 as shown in FIG.

In step S2000, a confirmation command flag indicating whether or not a confirmation command has been received is turned on, a series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

Next, the display setting process in step S1402 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the display control device 302.

The display setting process is a process for performing display setting of the effect symbol display device 91, and includes step S1.
When executed in 402, the process proceeds to step S2100 as shown in FIG.

In step S2100, it is determined whether or not the prefetch command flag is turned on. If it is determined that the prefetch command flag is turned on (YES), it is determined that the prefetch command has been received. Proceeding to S2102, turning off the prefetch command flag, step S
2104 is entered.

In step S2104, in order to set the reserved ball symbol corresponding to the reserved ball related to the pre-reading effect as a predetermined notice symbol (for example, a star symbol), a display image of the reserved ball symbol is displayed based on the reserved ball number determination information. The reserved ball number image data for configuration is expanded in a predetermined area of the work RAM 374. For example, if the number of reserved balls at the start winning opening 84a is three and the third reserved ball is determined to be a big hit in the pre-reading process 1, the third reserved ball displayed at the lower left of the main display area Dm The symbol is set to a predetermined notice symbol. Also, if the number of reserved balls at the start winning opening 84b is four and the fourth reserved ball is determined to be a big hit in the pre-reading process 2, the fourth reserved ball displayed at the lower right of the main display area Dm A ball symbol is set as a predetermined notice symbol. On the other hand, the start winning opening 8
If the number of reserved balls in 4a is three and it is determined that none of them is a big hit in the prefetch process 1, three reserved ball symbols are set in the lower left of the main display area Dm. In addition, the number of reserved balls at the start winning opening 84b is 4
Thus, if it is determined in the prefetch process 2 that none of them is a big hit, four reserved ball symbols are set in the lower right of the main display area Dm.

On the other hand, since the display control device 302 knows the variation time of the effect symbol from the received variation pattern command, the start winning opening is obtained when the variation time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the effect symbol with respect to the winning prize opening 84a. It can be determined that the retention ball 84a has been digested. In this case, the first reserved ball symbol or predetermined notice symbol from the right in the lower left area of the main display area Dm is deleted, and the second and subsequent reserved ball symbols or predetermined notice symbols from the right are shifted one by one to the right. As shown, a reserved ball symbol or a predetermined notice symbol is set in the lower left of the main display area Dm. Similarly, the display control device 302 may determine that the reserved ball of the start winning opening 84b has been digested when the variation time has elapsed since the start of the change in the effect design for the winning at the starting winning opening 84b. it can. In this case, the first reserved ball symbol or the predetermined notice symbol from the left in the lower right area of the main display area Dm is deleted, and the second and subsequent reserved ball symbols or the predetermined notice symbol from the left are one on the left side. A reserved ball symbol or a predetermined notice symbol is set in the lower right of the main display area Dm so as to be shifted.

Since the jackpot type can be specified based on the variation pattern acquired from the prefetch command, the display mode of the predetermined notice symbol can be changed depending on the specified jackpot type. For example, a predetermined notice symbol is displayed in red for a promiscuous jackpot, blue for a JUB jackpot, and yellow for a sudden jackpot. Also, identification information (for example, the name of the jackpot type) that can identify the jackpot type can be displayed along with a predetermined notice symbol. Similarly, since it is possible to identify the small hit, out of reach and non out of reach based on the fluctuation pattern obtained from the pre-read command, the predetermined notice pattern of the predetermined notice pattern is determined depending on the specified small hit, out of reach and out of reach. The display mode can also be varied. For example,
The predetermined notice symbol is displayed in green when the hit is small, orange when it is out of reach, and white when it is out of reach. In addition, identification information (for example, their names) that can identify small hits, out-of-reach and out-of-reach out can be displayed along with a predetermined notice symbol. Of course, in the case of non-reach or non-reach, a predetermined notice symbol need not be displayed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2106, a pointer update process is performed to update the pointer of the effect data table 410 in the table buffer, and the process proceeds to step S2108.

In step S2108, the effect data of the record pointed to by the pointer of the effect data table 410 is acquired in the table buffer, and the acquired effect data is stored in the work RAM 37.
In step S2110, “1” is subtracted from the value of the time counter, and the process proceeds to step S2112.

In step S2112, it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter is “0” or less. If it is determined that the value of the time counter is “0” or less (YES), the process proceeds to step S 2114.

In step S2114, it is determined whether or not the confirmed command flag is on. If it is determined that the confirmed command flag is on (YES), it is determined that a confirmed command has been received, and the process proceeds to step S2116. To turn off the confirmation command flag, step S
2118.

In step S2118, the address of the effect data table 410 for fixed display is acquired from the determined command management table, the effect data table 410 for fixed display is read from the program ROM 372 based on the acquired address, and the process proceeds to step S2120.

In step S2120, the effect data table 410 for finalized display that has been read is set in the table buffer of the work RAM 374, the process proceeds to step S2122, time data is acquired from the finalized command management table, and finalized display on the effect symbol display device 91 is performed. In order to set the display time for, a time counter is set based on the acquired time data, and a series of processing ends and the original processing is restored.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2114 that the confirmed command flag is off
(NO) determines that the confirmation command has not been received, ends the series of processes, and returns to the original process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2112 that the value of the time counter is greater than “0”
(NO) ends a series of processes and returns to the original process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2100 that the prefetch command flag is off
(NO) determines that the prefetch command has not been received, and proceeds to step S2106.

Next, the display execution process in step S1404 will be described.
The display execution process is a process for generating drawing data to be processed by the image controller 376. The drawing data is data necessary for the image controller 376 to draw one screen. Data for one screen of the effect symbol display device 91 is transferred as one drawing data to the image controller 376 for each V interrupt, and the image controller 37 is based on one drawing data.
When one 6 draws, one screen is displayed.

First, the data structure of drawing data will be described.
FIG. 40 shows the data structure of the drawing data 418. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 40, the drawing data 418 includes background drawing data for designating display of the background to the image controller 376 and design for designating display of the effect design or the reserved ball design to the image controller 376. Drawing data, character drawing data for designating character display to the image controller 376, and effect drawing data for designating effect display to the image controller 376. . For example, the drawing data for the background includes an image (sprite), an image address in the character ROM 384, an image coordinate, an image rotation angle, an image scale, a semi-transparent value for making the image semi-transparent, and for drawing. Data regarding the frame buffers 386a and 386b to be used is included. The same contents are included in the drawing data for symbols, the drawing data for characters, and the drawing data for effects.

In the drawing data 418, the drawing data to be displayed on the previous layer is described in the later stage according to the agreement with the image controller 376. In the example of FIG. 40, since the effect, character, effect design or holding ball design, and background are displayed in this order, background drawing data, design drawing data, character drawing data, and effect drawing It is described from the top of the drawing data 418 in the order of data.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing display execution processing executed by the display control device 302.
When the display execution process is executed in step S1404, the process proceeds to step S2500 as shown in FIG.

In step S2500, background drawing data is generated based on the effect data developed in the predetermined area of the work RAM 374, and the process proceeds to step S2502, where the work RAM 37 is moved.
The drawing data for the symbol is generated based on the effect data and the reserved ball number image data developed in the predetermined area 4, and the process proceeds to step S2504.

In step S2504, drawing data for the character is generated based on the effect data developed in the predetermined area of the work RAM 374, the process proceeds to step S2506, and the work RA is performed.
The drawing data for the effect is generated based on the effect data developed in the predetermined area of M374, and the process proceeds to step S2508.

In step S 2508, the drawing data 418 including the generated drawing data is stored in the work RAM 374, the DMAC 378 is requested to transfer the drawing data 418 from the work RAM 374 to the image controller 376, and the series of processing ends. Return to the original process.

Next, the main process will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the display control device 302.

The main process is a process for performing the main control of the display control apparatus 302. When the main process is executed in the MPU 370, the process proceeds to step S2600 as shown in FIG.

In step S2600, an initial setting associated with power-on is performed. In the initial setting, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2602, interrupt permission is set, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off.

[Operation] Next, the operation of the present embodiment will be described.
First, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control unit 162 executes main control processing and enters a gameable state. The player uses the pachinko machine 10 with the rented game ball.
The game ball can be played by operating the game ball launch handle 41 and firing the game ball onto the game area of the game board 81.

When the game ball launched into the game area wins the start winning opening 84a, the main controller 162 acquires the value of the big hit random number counter C1 through steps S306 and S700, and wins the big hit based on the acquired random number counter value. A lottery will be held. In the jackpot lottery, the random number counter value is compared with a plurality of jackpot values, and if it matches any of the jackpot values, the jackpot is won.

When the jackpot is reached, through steps S702 to S706, the jackpot type, the stop symbol type of the effect symbol at the jackpot time, and the variation pattern at the jackpot time are determined. Then, the effect symbol is variably displayed with the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol after a predetermined variation time has elapsed. After the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, any of non-probable big hit, probable big hit, JUB big hit, sudden big hit and latent big hit will occur.

On the other hand, when the winning symbol is variably displayed and there is a winning at the start winning opening 84a, the value N1 of the reserved ball number counter is added through step S304. Next, through steps S308 to S314, the pre-reading processing flag 1 is turned on, the values of various random number counters are set to the pre-read determination value 1, and the value N1 of the reserved ball number counter is set to 1 as the pre-read reserved ball number.
Stored in 314. The processes in steps S308 to S314 are executed as a timer interrupt process. Then, through steps S802 and S804, the prefetch determination value 1 and the prefetch pending ball count 1 are read, and the prefetch effect is based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the read prefetch determination value 1. Lottery 1 is performed. In the pre-reading effect lottery 1, the random number counter value is compared with a plurality of jackpot values, and if it matches one of the jackpot values, it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. If it is determined that the jackpot is reached, the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the jackpot is read through steps S806 and S808, and the variation pattern is determined based on the read variation pattern table 406. Then, through step S 810, a prefetch command for designating the determined variation pattern and the read prefetch pending ball count of 1 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143. The processes in steps S802 to S814 are executed as a main process that is interrupted during the execution of the timer interrupt process.

When the sound lamp control device 143 receives the prefetch command, the received prefetch command is transmitted to the display control device 302.

When receiving the prefetch command, the display control device 302 receives steps S1600 to S160.
6, the prefetch command flag is turned on, the fluctuation pattern and the prefetch hold ball number 1 are acquired from the received prefetch command, and the hold ball number discrimination information is set. When the pre-read command flag is turned on, through steps S2102 and S2104, the reserved ball number image data is expanded based on the reserved ball number determination information, and the reserved ball symbol is displayed based on the expanded reserved ball number image data. The Among these, the reserved ball symbol corresponding to the reserved ball that is a big hit is displayed as a predetermined notice symbol.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a reserved ball symbol and a predetermined notice symbol displayed at the lower left of the main display area Dm.

If there is a winning at the start winning opening 84a during the change of the production symbol, and it is determined that the winning is out in the pre-reading production lottery 1, as shown in FIG. 43 (a), the main display area The reserved ball symbol Rm1 is displayed first from the right in the lower left area of Dm. Next, when there is further winning at the start winning opening 84a during the change of the production symbol, when it is determined that the winning is lost in the pre-reading effect lottery 1, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), The reserved ball symbol Rm2 is displayed second from the right in the lower left area of the main display area Dm. Then, when there is further winning at the start winning opening 84a during the change of the production symbol, when it is determined that the winning is a big hit in the pre-reading production lottery 1, as shown in FIG. 43 (c), A predetermined notice symbol Rms is displayed third from the right in the lower left area of the main display area Dm.

On the other hand, when the variation display of the effect symbol is finished, as shown in FIG. 43 (d), the first reserved ball symbol Rm1 from the right in the lower left area of the main display area Dm is deleted, and the second reserved from the right The ball symbol Rm2 and the third predetermined notice symbol Rms are shifted one by one to the right. further,
If there is no winning at the start winning opening 84a during the next variation of the production symbol and the variation display of the production symbol is finished, as shown in FIG. 43 (e), the first from the right in the lower left area of the main display area Dm The reserved ball symbol Rm1 is deleted, and the second predetermined notice symbol Rms from the right is shifted to the right by one. Then, the variation display of the effect symbol is started, but when the winning winning opening 84a is won during the variation of the effect symbol, when it is determined in the pre-reading effect lottery 1 that the winning is missed, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 3F, the reserved ball symbol Rm2 is displayed second from the right in the lower left area of the main display area Dm.

On the other hand, when the variation display of the effect symbol is finished, as shown in FIG. 43 (g), the first predetermined notice symbol Rms from the right in the lower left area of the main display area Dm is deleted, and the second one from the right is deleted. The reserved ball symbol Rm2 is shifted to the right by one. And, the variation display of the production symbol is started,
When this variable display ends, a jackpot symbol is displayed and a jackpot is generated.

On the other hand, when the probable jackpot, JUB jackpot or sudden hit jackpot is reached, the probabilistic state and the time-short state are entered, and the movable piece of the start winning opening 84b is opened, making it easier for the game ball to win the starting winning opening 84b. When the game ball wins the start winning opening 84b, the main controller 16
2, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is acquired through the processing corresponding to step S356 and step S700, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the acquired random number counter value. In the jackpot lottery, the random number counter value is compared with a plurality of jackpot values, and if it matches any of the jackpot values, the jackpot is won.

When the jackpot is reached, through the processing corresponding to steps S702 to S706, the jackpot type, the stop symbol type of the effect symbol at the jackpot, and the variation pattern at the jackpot are determined. Then, the effect symbol is variably displayed with the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol after a predetermined variation time has elapsed.

On the other hand, in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed and there is a winning at the start winning opening 84b, the value N2 of the reserved ball number counter is added through step S354. Next, through steps S358 to S364, the pre-reading processing flag 2 is turned on, the values of various random number counters are set to the pre-read determination value 2, and the value N2 of the reserved ball number counter is set to 2 as the pre-read reserved ball number.
Stored in 314. The processes in steps S358 to S364 are executed as a timer interrupt process. Then, through steps S852 and S854, the prefetch determination value 2 and the prefetch pending ball count 2 are read, and the prefetch effect is based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the read prefetch determination value 2. Lottery 2 is performed. In the pre-reading effect lottery 2, the random number counter value is compared with a plurality of jackpot values, and if it matches one of the jackpot values, it is determined that it is a jackpot. If it is determined that the jackpot is reached, the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the jackpot is read through steps S856 and S858, and the variation pattern is determined based on the read variation pattern table 406. Then, through step S860, a prefetch command for designating the determined variation pattern and the number of prefetched reserved balls 2 read out is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143. The processes in steps S852 to S864 are executed as a main process that is interrupted during the execution of the timer interrupt process.

When the sound lamp control device 143 receives the prefetch command, the received prefetch command is transmitted to the display control device 302.

When receiving the prefetch command, the display control device 302 receives steps S1600 to S160.
6, the prefetch command flag is turned on, the fluctuation pattern and the prefetch hold ball number 2 are acquired from the received prefetch command, and the hold ball number discrimination information is set. When the pre-read command flag is turned on, through steps S2102 and S2104, the reserved ball number image data is expanded based on the reserved ball number determination information, and the reserved ball symbol is displayed based on the expanded reserved ball number image data. The Among these, the reserved ball symbol corresponding to the reserved ball that is a big hit is displayed as a predetermined notice symbol.

In such a configuration, when the variation display of the effect symbols is finished and the number of reserved balls in the start winning opening 84b is “1” or more, and there is a winning in the starting winning opening 84b, the start winning prize is obtained. Since the reserved ball of the mouth 84b is preferentially digested, the jackpot lottery and the pre-reading effect lottery 2
Are performed simultaneously. In the jackpot lottery, if the probability variation state, a plurality of random number counter values (1
4) jackpot value. Similarly, in the pre-reading effect lottery 2, the random number counter value is compared with a plurality (14 pieces) of jackpot values. Further, when the variation display of the effect symbol is finished and the number of reserved balls in the start winning opening 84a is “1” or more, and there is a winning in the starting winning opening 84a, the pre-reading effect lottery 1 is also performed. Done at the same time. Similarly, in the pre-reading effect lottery 1, the random number counter value is compared with a plurality (14 pieces) of jackpot values. Accordingly, when the variation display of the effect symbols is finished, the number of reserved balls at the start winning opening 84a or the starting winning opening 84b is “1”.
In the above case, and when there is a prize at the start prize opening 84a and a prize at the start prize slot 84b, 14 × 3 = 42 comparison processes are simultaneously performed, so the processing load increases. . Here, considering the case where the pre-reading effect process of the start winning port 84a and the pre-reading effect process of the start winning port 84b are executed as the timer interrupt process, the processing load of the timer interrupt process increases, and the timer interrupt process May not be completed within the interrupt cycle. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, steps S308 to S314 and S358 to S364 are executed as timer interrupt processing, and steps S800 to S824 and S850 to S874 are executed as main processing. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the embedding process.

[Effects] When there is a winning at the start winning opening 84a or a winning at the starting winning opening 84b, a jackpot lottery is performed, and when there is a winning at the starting winning opening 84a, the pre-reading effect lottery 1 is selected, and the start winning opening 84b is selected. In the pachinko machine 10 that performs the pre-reading effect lottery 2 when there is a winning, the number of reserved balls at the starting winning port 84a or the starting winning port 84b is “1” or more when the change display of the effect symbol is finished. In some cases, and when there is a winning at the start winning port 84a and a winning at the starting winning port 84b, the processing load increases as described above, and the timer interrupt process does not end within the interrupt cycle. May occur.

When the timer interrupt process does not end within the interrupt cycle, the big hit random number counter C1 is updated by the timer interrupt process (the process of step S204).
The update time of the jackpot random number counter C1 becomes longer than when it ends within the interrupt cycle. If this phenomenon occurs when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot value, the time for which the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot value becomes longer than the time when the numerical range of the jackpot random number counter C1 is completely updated. Winning probability of lottery is default (for example, 2/73
It will increase from 9). Specifically, since the interrupt period of the timer interrupt process is 2 [ms], when the timer interrupt process ends within the interrupt period, the time during which the numerical value range of the big hit random number counter C1 is all updated Is 739 × 2 [ms] = 1478 [ms], and the time when the jackpot random number counter C1 is the jackpot value is 2 × 2 [ms] = 4 [ms], so the winning probability of the jackpot lottery is 4 [ms] / 1478 [ms] = 2/739 (default), but the timer interrupt processing does not end within the interrupt cycle, and the time when the jackpot random number counter C1 at that time is the jackpot value is, for example, 3 [ ms], the winning probability of the jackpot lottery is (3 [ms] + 2 [
ms]) / (3 [ms] +1476 [ms]) = 5/1479. Conversely, if this phenomenon occurs when the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the jackpot value, the jackpot random number counter C1
Since the time when the jackpot random number counter C1 is the jackpot value is relatively short with respect to the time when all the numerical ranges of 1 are updated, the winning probability of the jackpot lottery is reduced from the default. Therefore, there is a problem in that the winning probability of the jackpot lottery does not become the default and affects the gameability.

When the timer interruption process does not end within the interruption period, the start of the big hit lottery is delayed, so that a waiting time is generated from the stop display of the effect symbol to the start of variation. During this time, the holding ball is not digested, so that there is a problem that useless balls are generated or that the player is bothered to stop. Further, if such a phenomenon occurs frequently, there is a problem that the operating rate of the gaming machine is lowered.

In order to solve these problems, for example, it is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the prefetch effect lottery 1 or the prefetch effect lottery 2 is not performed in a probability variation state where the random number counter value is compared with a plurality of jackpot values.

However, in this configuration, there is a problem in that diversification of the production cannot be realized because the pre-reading effect that further enhances the game cannot be synergistically performed in a probable state where the game is exciting.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a winning is made at the starting winning opening 84a, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is acquired, and when the effect design is changed and displayed, the winning at the starting winning opening 84a is obtained. Is stored as the number of reserved balls, and when the number of reserved balls is stored when the change of the design symbol is finished, the jackpot random number counter C acquired at the time of winning is stored.
A jackpot lottery is performed by comparing the value of 1 with the jackpot value, and a jackpot is generated based on the result of the jackpot lottery. If there is a winning at the start winning opening 84a, the jackpot random number acquired at the time of winning The pre-reading effect lottery 1 is performed by comparing the value of the counter C1 with the jackpot value, and based on the result of the pre-reading effect lottery 1, the effect of notifying the occurrence of the jackpot is performed, and steps S800 to S824 are performed. The process is executed as a main process that is interrupted while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

As a result, the timer interruption process is interrupted even when the number of reserved balls at the start winning opening 84a is stored when the change display of the effect symbol is finished and there is a winning at the starting winning opening 84a. Since it ends within the cycle, the winning probability of the jackpot lottery becomes the default, and it is possible to prevent the gameability from being affected. Also, no wasted balls are generated or the player is not bothered to stop. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the operating rate of the gaming machine from decreasing. In addition, in the probable state where the game is exciting, the start winning opening 84a
It is possible to synergistically perform a pre-reading effect that further enhances the game for winning a prize. Therefore, the diversification of production can be realized as compared with the conventional case.

On the other hand, in order to solve the above problem, for example, it may be possible to adopt a configuration in which the entire pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84a is executed as the main process.

However, in this configuration, since the random number used for the big hit lottery is acquired by the timer interrupt process and the random number used for the prefetch effect lottery 1 is acquired by the main process, the values of both random numbers may be different depending on the timing. There is a problem of having sex. If both random numbers are different,
For example, there is a possibility that a problem that a jackpot does not occur despite the effect of notifying that a jackpot will occur will occur.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84a is distributed to the timer interrupt process and the main process. That is, the process of steps S308 to S314 is executed as a timer interrupt process, and the process of steps S800 to S824 is executed as a main process.

Thereby, it can prevent that the random number used for jackpot lottery and the random number used for pre-reading effect lottery 1 become different values.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a winning is made at the start winning opening 84b, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is acquired, and when the effect design is changed and displayed, there is a winning at the starting winning opening 84b. If the winning prize is stored as the number of reserved balls, and the winning prize opening 84b is won, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired at the time of winning the prize is compared with the jackpot value in advance. An effect lottery 2 is performed, and an effect of notifying that a big hit will occur based on the result of the pre-reading effect lottery 2 is performed, and the processes in steps S850 to S874 are interrupted during the execution of the timer interrupt process. Run as.

As a result, when the change display of the production symbol is finished, the number of reserved balls in the start winning opening 84a or the starting winning opening 84b is stored, and the winning in the starting winning opening 84a and the winning in the starting winning opening 84b are also performed. Even if there is, the timer interrupt process ends within the interrupt cycle.
The winning probability of the jackpot lottery becomes the default, and it is possible to prevent the gameability from being affected. Also, no wasted balls are generated or the player is not bothered to stop. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the operating rate of the gaming machine from decreasing. In addition, in the probability variation state where the game is exciting, the winning prize opening 84a and the starting prize opening 84
It is possible to synergistically perform a pre-reading effect that further enhances the game with respect to winning in b. Therefore, diversification of production can be further realized.

On the other hand, in order to solve the above problem, for example, it may be possible to adopt a configuration in which all of the pre-reading effect processing of the start winning opening 84a and all of the pre-reading effect processing of the starting winning port 84b are executed as main processing.

However, in this configuration, the random number used for the big hit lottery is acquired by the timer interrupt process, and the random number used for the prefetch effect lottery 1 and the random number used for the prefetch effect lottery 2 are acquired by the main process. There is a problem that these random numbers may be different depending on the case. If the values of these random numbers are different, for example, there is a possibility that there will be a problem that no jackpot is generated despite the effect of notifying that a jackpot will occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84b is also distributed to the timer interrupt process and the main process. That is, the process of steps S358 to S364 is executed as a timer interrupt process, and the process of steps S850 to S874 is executed as a main process.

Thereby, the random number used for the jackpot lottery and the random number used for the prefetch effect lottery 1 become different values, and the random number used for the jackpot lottery and the random number used for the prefetch effect lottery 2 become different values. Can be prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, while the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84a is being executed, the execution of the process for the next winning to the start winning opening 84a is prohibited.

As a result, even if there are consecutive winnings at the starting winning port 84a, the pre-reading effect processing of the starting winning port 84a is not executed for these winnings, so that the memory in the stack is reduced. Memory efficiency can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading process flag 1 is turned on at the start of execution of the pre-reading effect process at the start winning opening 84a, and the pre-reading process flag 1 at the end of execution of the pre-reading effect process at the start winning opening 84a. Is turned off, and when the pre-reading process flag 1 is turned on, execution of the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84a is prohibited.

Thereby, the execution of the process for the next winning to the start winning opening 84a is performed only by turning on and off the pre-reading process flag 1 at the start and end of execution of the pre-reading effect process of the starting winning opening 84a. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the pre-reading effect process for the start winning opening 84b, execution of the process for the next winning after the start winning opening 84b is prohibited.

As a result, even if there are consecutive winnings at the start winning opening 84b, the pre-reading effect processing of the starting winning opening 84b is not executed for these winnings, so that the memory in the stack is reduced. Memory efficiency can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading process flag 2 is turned on at the start of execution of the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84b, and the pre-reading process flag 2 is set at the end of execution of the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84b. Is turned off, and when the pre-reading processing flag 2 is turned on, execution of the pre-reading effect processing of the start winning opening 84b is prohibited.

Thereby, the execution of the process for the next winning to the start winning opening 84b is performed only by turning on and off the pre-reading processing flag 2 at the start and end of execution of the pre-reading effect process of the starting winning opening 84b. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a process of acquiring each value of the random number counter used for the big hit lottery (process of step S306) and a process of acquiring each value of the random number counter used for the prefetch effect lottery 1 (step Step S312) is executed as a timer interrupt process.

As for winning a prize at the start winning opening 84a, the result of the jackpot lottery and the pre-reading effect lottery 1
Therefore, the random number used for the jackpot lottery and the random number used for the pre-reading effect lottery 1 must be the same value. If the values of both random numbers are different, for example,
This is because there is a possibility that a problem that a jackpot does not occur may occur despite the fact that an announcement is made that the jackpot will occur. However, for example, if the process of step S306 is executed separately as the timer interrupt process and the process of step S312 is executed separately as the main process, the values of both random numbers may be different depending on the timing.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the process of step S306 and the process of step S312 are executed as a timer interrupt process, so that a random number used for the jackpot lottery and a pre-reading effect for a certain winning at the start winning opening 84a It can be prevented that the random number used in the lottery 1 becomes a different value.

Further, in the present embodiment, a process for determining a winning at the start winning opening 84a (step S3).
00 process), the process of step S306 and the process of step S312 are executed as a timer interrupt process.

Thereby, even if the processing load of the main process and other processes increases depending on the content of the game, it is possible to determine the winning to the start winning opening 84a at a regular timing. Moreover, the random number used for the jackpot lottery and the random number used for the pre-reading effect lottery 1 can be acquired at the winning timing to the start winning opening 84a.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a process of acquiring each value of the random number counter used for the big hit lottery (the process of step S356) and a process of acquiring each value of the random number counter used for the prefetch effect lottery 2 (step Step S362) is executed as a timer interrupt process.

For winnings at the start winning opening 84b, the results of the jackpot lottery and the pre-reading effect lottery 2
Therefore, the random number used for the jackpot lottery and the random number used for the pre-reading effect lottery 2 need to be the same value. If the values of both random numbers are different, for example,
This is because there is a possibility that a problem that a jackpot does not occur may occur despite the fact that an announcement is made that the jackpot will occur. However, for example, if the process of step S356 is performed separately as the timer interrupt process and the process of step S362 is performed separately as the main process, the values of both random numbers may be different depending on the timing.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the process of step S356 and the process of step S362 are executed as a timer interrupt process, so that a random number used in the jackpot lottery and a pre-reading effect for a certain winning at the start winning opening 84b It can be prevented that the random number used in the lottery 2 becomes a different value.

Further, in the present embodiment, a process for determining a winning to the start winning opening 84b (step S3).
50 process), the process of step S356 and the process of step S362 are executed as a timer interrupt process.

Thereby, even if the processing load of the main process and other processes increases depending on the content of the game, it is possible to determine the winning to the start winning opening 84b at a regular timing. Moreover, the random number used for the big hit lottery and the random number used for the pre-reading effect lottery 2 can be acquired at the winning timing to the start winning opening 84b.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, main controller 162 issues a prefetch command including prefetch pending ball count 1 when the value of jackpot random number counter C1 matches the jackpot value as a result of prefetch effect lottery 1. Based on the received prefetch command, the display control device 302 displays a predetermined notice symbol at the display position corresponding to the prefetch hold ball number 1 in the effect symbol display device 91 based on the received prefetch command.

As a result, the effect symbol display device 91 can display a predetermined notice symbol at a display position corresponding to the number of pre-reading reserved balls as an effect of notifying that a big hit will occur. Therefore, the player can grasp which winning prize to the start winning opening 84a is a big hit only by looking at the notice symbol on the effect symbol display device 91.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a process for updating the value N1 of the holding ball counter (step S30).
4) and the process of storing in the RAM 314 the number of reserved balls at the start winning opening 84a as the number of pre-reading reserved balls 1 (the process of step S314) is executed as a timer interrupt process.

As in the present embodiment, the process of step S304 is set as a timer interrupt process, and step S304
When the process of 810 is executed separately as the main process, it is necessary to pass the number of balls held at the start winning hole 84a between the timer interrupt process and the main process.
Is temporarily stored in the RAM 314. At this time, the start winning opening 84a
As for the number of reserved balls, since it is necessary to display a predetermined notice symbol at the display position corresponding to the number of reserved balls, the number of reserved balls in the start winning opening 84a and the number of pre-reading reserved balls 1 in the RAM 314 are the same. Must be the value of. This is because, if the number of the reserved balls is different, for example, there is a possibility that a predetermined notice symbol is displayed at a position where the predetermined notice symbol should not be displayed. However, for example, if the process of step S304 is executed separately as a timer interrupt process and the process of step S314 is executed separately as a main process, the numbers of both reserved balls may be different depending on the timing.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the processing in step S304 and the processing in step S314 are executed as timer interruption processing.
It is possible to prevent the number of pre-reading reserved balls 1 of 4 from being different.

Further, in the present embodiment, a process for determining a winning at the start winning opening 84a (step S3).
00 process), the process of step S304 and the process of step S314 are executed as a timer interrupt process.

Thereby, even if the processing load of the main process and other processes increases depending on the content of the game, it is possible to determine the winning to the start winning opening 84a at a regular timing. Further, the number of reserved balls at the start winning port 84a can be stored at the timing of winning the start winning port 84a, and the number of pre-reading reserved balls 1 can be stored in the RAM 314.

Further, in the present embodiment, a process of storing the pre-reading reserved ball number 1 in the RAM 314 (process of step S314) and a process of reading the pre-reading reserved ball number 1 from the RAM 314 (step S802).
The number of pre-reading reserved balls in the RAM 314 is updated so that the number of pre-reading reserved balls in the RAM 314 matches the number of held balls in the start winning opening 84a.

When a process for changing the number of balls held in the start winning opening 84a is executed between the process in step S314 and the process in step S802 as in the symbol control process, There is a possibility that the number of pre-reading reserved balls is different, and there is a possibility that a predetermined notice symbol is displayed at a position where the predetermined notice symbol should not be displayed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the number of pre-reading reserved balls 1 in the RAM 314 is updated so that the number of pre-reading reserved balls 1 in the RAM 314 matches the number of reserved balls in the starting winning port 84a. Can be further prevented from being different from the number of pre-held balls in the RAM 314.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the change display of the effect symbol is finished and the number of balls held at the start winning opening 84a is stored, “1” is subtracted from the number of held balls at the start winning opening 84a, RA
“1” is subtracted from the number of pre-reading pending balls 1 of M314.

Thereby, it can further prevent that the number of reserved balls of the start winning opening 84a and the number of pre-reading reserved balls 1 of the RAM 314 are different.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of prefetched pending balls 1 is “0” as a result of the subtraction of the number of prefetched pending balls 1, the prefetching processing flag 1 is turned off.

As a result, execution of the prefetch process 1 is prohibited, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load and to cancel the effect of notifying that the jackpot will occur.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the value of the random number counter used for the big hit lottery is stored in the RAM 3
The random number counter value stored in the first area 14 and used for the prefetch effect lottery 1 is stored in the RAM 31.
4 is stored in a second area different from the first area.

When the number of reserved balls in the start winning opening 84a and the number of pre-reading reserved balls 1 in the RAM 314 differ depending on the timing, the value of the random number counter used for the jackpot lottery or the pre-reading effect lottery 1 is stored in the same area. In other words, the value of the random number used in the jackpot lottery is different from the value of the random number counter obtained for the jackpot lottery, or the value of the random number used in the prefetch effect lottery 1 is acquired for the prefetch effect lottery 1. It may be different from the value of the random number counter.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the value of the random number counter used for the jackpot lottery and the value of the random number counter used for the pre-reading effect lottery 1 are stored in different areas of the RAM 314, respectively. The random number value used in is different from the random number counter value acquired for the jackpot lottery, or the random number value used in the prefetch effect lottery 1 is the same as the random counter value acquired for the prefetch effect lottery 1 It is possible to prevent differences.

Further, in the present embodiment, detection information indicating the detection result of the start winning mouth sensor 154a is acquired every time the timer interrupt process is executed, and based on the detection information obtained by executing the timer interrupt process a plurality of times. It is determined whether or not a prize is received at the start winning opening 84a.

When the timer interruption process is executed when there is a winning at the start winning opening 84a, the winning at the starting winning opening 84a is determined, and therefore the execution of the pre-reading effect process at the starting winning opening 84a is started. However, at that time, if the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84a is being executed for the previous winning,
Since the pre-reading processing flag 1 is on, execution of the processing is prohibited. Then, since the pre-read command is not transmitted to the display control device 302 for the next winning to the starting winning opening 84a, there is a possibility that the reserved symbol of the starting winning opening 84a is not displayed on the effect symbol display apparatus 91.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the timer interruption process is not executed a plurality of times during the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84a, so that the next winning to the start winning opening 84a is started. Execution of the pre-reading effect process at the winning opening 84a is not prohibited, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the reserved ball at the starting winning opening 84a is not displayed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, main controller 162 determines a prefetch command including prefetch pending ball number 2 when the value of jackpot random number counter C1 matches the jackpot value as a result of prefetch effect lottery 2. Based on the received prefetch command, the display control device 302 displays a predetermined notice symbol at the display position corresponding to the prefetch hold ball number 2 in the effect design display device 91 based on the received prefetch command.

As a result, the effect symbol display device 91 can display a predetermined notice symbol at a display position corresponding to the pre-reading reserved ball number 2 as an effect of notifying that a big hit will occur. Therefore, the player can grasp which winning prize to the start winning opening 84b is a big hit only by looking at the notice symbol on the effect symbol display device 91.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a process for updating the value N2 of the holding ball counter (step S35).
4) and the process of storing in the RAM 314 the number of reserved balls at the start winning opening 84b as the number of pre-reading reserved balls 2 (the process of step S364) is executed as a timer interrupt process.

As in the present embodiment, the process of step S354 is set as a timer interrupt process.
When the process of 860 is executed separately as the main process, it is necessary to pass the number of reserved balls of the start winning opening 84b between the timer interrupt process and the main process.
Is temporarily stored in the RAM 314. At this time, the start winning opening 84b
As for the number of reserved balls, since it is necessary to display a predetermined notice symbol at the display position corresponding to the number of reserved balls, the number of reserved balls in the start winning opening 84b and the number of pre-reading reserved balls 2 in the RAM 314 are the same. Must be the value of. This is because, if the number of the reserved balls is different, for example, there is a possibility that a predetermined notice symbol is displayed at a position where the predetermined notice symbol should not be displayed. However, for example, if the process of step S354 is executed separately as the timer interrupt process and the process of step S364 is executed separately as the main process, the number of both reserved balls may differ depending on the timing.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the processing in step S354 and the processing in step S364 are executed as timer interruption processing.
It is possible to prevent the number of pre-reading reserved balls 2 of 4 from being different.

Further, in the present embodiment, a process for determining a winning to the start winning opening 84b (step S3).
50 process), the process of step S354 and the process of step S364 are executed as a timer interrupt process.

Thereby, even if the processing load of the main process and other processes increases depending on the content of the game, it is possible to determine the winning to the start winning opening 84b at a regular timing. Further, the number of reserved balls at the start winning opening 84b can be stored at the timing of winning the start winning opening 84b and the number of pre-reading reserved balls 2 can be stored in the RAM 314.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a process for storing the pre-reading reserved ball number 2 in the RAM 314 (process in step S364) and a process for reading the pre-reading reserved ball number 2 from the RAM 314 (step S852).
The pre-reading reserved ball number 2 in the RAM 314 is updated so that the pre-reading reserved ball number 2 in the RAM 314 coincides with the reserved ball number in the start winning opening 84b.

When the process in which the number of balls held in the start winning opening 84b is changed as in the symbol control process between the process in step S364 and the process in step S852, the number of held balls in the start winning opening 84b and the RAM 314 There is a possibility that the number of pre-reading reserved balls is different, and there is a possibility that a predetermined notice symbol is displayed at a position where the predetermined notice symbol should not be displayed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading reserved ball number 2 in the RAM 314 is updated so that the pre-reading reserved ball number 2 in the RAM 314 matches the reserved ball number in the starting winning port 84b. It can be further prevented that the number of reserved balls and the number of prefetched reserved balls 2 in the RAM 314 are different.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the change display of the effect symbol is finished and the number of balls held at the start winning opening 84b is stored, “1” is subtracted from the number of held balls at the start winning opening 84b, RA
“1” is subtracted from the number of pre-reading reserved balls 2 of M314.

Thereby, it can further prevent that the number of reserved balls in the start winning opening 84b and the number of pre-reading reserved balls 2 in the RAM 314 are different.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the prefetch pending ball count 2 is “0” as a result of the subtraction of the prefetch pending ball count 2, the prefetching processing flag 2 is turned off.

As a result, execution of the prefetch process 2 is prohibited, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load and to cancel the effect of notifying that the jackpot will occur.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the value of the random number counter used for the big hit lottery is stored in the RAM 3
The random number counter value stored in the first area 14 and used for the pre-reading effect lottery 2 is stored in the RAM 31.
4 is stored in a second area different from the first area.

When the number of reserved balls at the start winning opening 84b and the number of pre-reading reserved balls 2 in the RAM 314 differ depending on the timing, the value of the random number counter used for the big hit lottery or the pre-reading effect lottery 2 is stored in the same area. In other words, the value of the random number used in the jackpot lottery is different from the value of the random number counter acquired for the jackpot lottery, or the value of the random number used in the prefetch effect lottery 2 is acquired for the prefetch effect lottery 2. It may be different from the value of the random number counter.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the value of the random number counter used for the jackpot lottery and the value of the random number counter used for the pre-reading effect lottery 2 are stored in different areas of the RAM 314. The random number value used in is different from the random counter value acquired for the jackpot lottery, or the random number value used in the prefetch effect lottery 2 is the same as the random counter value acquired for the prefetch effect lottery 2 It is possible to prevent differences.

Further, in the present embodiment, detection information indicating the detection result of the start winning mouth sensor 154b is acquired every time the timer interrupt process is executed, and based on the detection information obtained by executing the timer interrupt process a plurality of times. It is determined whether or not a prize is received at the start winning opening 84b.

When the timer interruption process is executed when there is a winning at the start winning opening 84b, the winning at the starting winning opening 84b is determined, and therefore the execution of the pre-reading effect process at the starting winning opening 84b is started. However, at that time, if the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84b is being executed for the previous winning,
Since the pre-reading process flag 2 is on, execution of the process is prohibited. Then, since the pre-read command is not transmitted to the display control device 302 for the next winning to the starting winning opening 84b, there is a possibility that the reserved symbol of the starting winning opening 84b is not displayed on the effect symbol display apparatus 91.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the timer interruption process is not executed a plurality of times while the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84b is being executed, so the next winning to the start winning opening 84b is started. Execution of the pre-reading effect process at the winning opening 84b is not prohibited, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the reserved ball at the starting winning opening 84b is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, the production symbol display device 91 corresponds to the display means of the invention 1 or 2, and steps S702 to S710, S714 to S718, S720 to S724 correspond to the change display means of the invention 1 or 2, Steps S806 to S810 and S856 to S860 are
This corresponds to the notice effect means of the invention 1 or 2. The timer interrupt process corresponds to the predetermined periodic process of the invention 1 or 2, the main process corresponds to the interrupted process of the invention 1 or 2, and the production symbol corresponds to the identification information of the invention 1 or 2. ing.

In the present embodiment, winning at the start winning opening 84a or winning at the starting winning opening 84b corresponds to establishment of the predetermined condition of Invention 1, and steps S304 and S354 correspond to the condition establishment storage means of Invention 1. Steps S804 and S854 correspond to the second special prize determining means of the first aspect. Steps S602, S604, S620, and S700 correspond to the first special prize determination unit of the first aspect.

In the present embodiment, the start winning port 84a corresponds to the first winning port of Invention 2, the starting winning port 84b corresponds to the second winning port of Invention 2, and Step S304 is the first winning port of Invention 2. Corresponding to the storage means, step S306 corresponds to the first random number acquisition means of the invention 2. Also,
Step S312 corresponds to the second random number acquisition means of the invention 2, and step S354 is the invention 2
The step S356 corresponds to the third random number acquisition unit of the second aspect, and the step S362 corresponds to the fourth random number acquisition unit of the second aspect.

In the present embodiment, steps S602, S604, and S700 correspond to the first special prize determination unit of the invention 2, and steps S602, S620, and S700 correspond to the third special prize determination unit of the invention 2, and step S804. Corresponds to the second special prize judging means of the invention 2. Step S854 corresponds to the fourth special prize determining means of the second aspect.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. 44 and 45
These are figures which show 2nd Embodiment of the game machine which concerns on this invention.

This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the processes in steps S500 to S512 are executed as a timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, only different parts from the first embodiment will be described, and overlapping parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the timer interrupt process will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by main controller 162.

The MPU 310 executes the timer interrupt process of FIG. 44 instead of the timer interrupt process of FIG.

The timer interrupt process is a process executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 [ms])
When executed in 310, the process proceeds to step S500 as shown in FIG. Then, steps S500, S200, S202, S204, S502, S504, S506
, S206, S208, S508, S510, and S512 are executed in that order, and the series of processes is terminated to return to the original process.

Next, the main process will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by main controller 162.

The MPU 310 executes the main process of FIG. 45 instead of the main process of FIG.
When the main process is executed in the MPU 310, as shown in FIG.
530. And the process of step S530 and S532 is performed in that order, and it transfers to step S514.

In step S514, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is off. If it is determined that the power failure flag is off (YES), it is determined that the power is not shut off, and the process proceeds to step S518. To do. And the process of step S518 and S520 is performed in that order,
The process proceeds to step S530.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S514 that the power failure flag is on (NO), it is determined that a power interruption has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S522. And step S522,
The processes of S524, S526, and S528 are executed in that order, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off.

[Effect] The configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment.
Since the processing of 608 to S614 is provided, even if a process in which the number of retained balls in the start winning opening 84a is changed between the start winning process 1 and the prefetching process 1 as in the symbol control process, the start is started. It is possible to prevent the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 84a from being different from the number of pre-reading reserved balls 1 in the RAM 314. Similarly, since the processes of steps S624 to S630 are provided, the start winning process 2
Even if a process for changing the number of balls held at the start winning opening 84b is executed as in the symbol control process, the number of held balls at the start winning opening 84b and the pre-reading reserved balls in the RAM 314 It is possible to prevent the number 2 from being different.

However, in the present embodiment, this problem can be solved by another configuration without providing the processing of steps S608 to S614 and the processing of steps S624 to S630. That is, the symbol control process for subtracting the number of balls held at the start winning opening 84a or the start prize opening 84b and the start winning processes 1 and 2 for adding the number of held balls at the start winning opening 84a or the start winning opening 84b in that order are assigned to the timer. The prefetch processes 1 and 2 for transmitting prefetch commands including the prefetch pending ball numbers 1 and 2 are executed as the main process.

As a result, the process of changing the number of balls held in the start winning opening 84a between the start winning process 1 and the pre-reading process 1 is not executed, so the number of held balls in the start winning opening 84a and the number of pre-reading reserved balls in the RAM 314 1 can be prevented from differing. In addition, since the process in which the number of balls held in the start winning opening 84b changes between the start winning process 2 and the pre-reading process 2, the start winning opening 84b is not executed.
Can be prevented from being different from the number of pre-reading reserved balls 2 in the RAM 314.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. 46 and 47
These are figures which show 3rd Embodiment of the game machine which concerns on this invention.

The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84a and the pre-read effect process of the starting winning port 84b are executed in multiple. Hereinafter, only different parts from the first embodiment will be described, and overlapping parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the start winning process 1 will be described.
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 1 executed by the main controller 162.

The MPU 310 executes the start winning process 1 in FIG. 46 instead of the start winning process 1 in FIG.

When the start winning process 1 is executed in the MPU 310, the process proceeds to step S300 as shown in FIG. And the process of step S300, S302, S304, S306 is performed in that order, and it transfers to step S316.

In step S316, the bit at the position corresponding to the value N1 of the reserved ball number counter in the pre-reading flag information 1 is turned on, and the process proceeds to step S312 and the big hit random number counter C
1. Each value of jackpot type random number counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and fluctuation pattern random number counter CS is acquired, and each value of the acquired random number counter is set to the value N1 of the reserved ball number counter.
Is stored as a prefetch determination value 1 in the storage area of the RAM 314 corresponding to, and the process proceeds to step S314. Then, the process of step S314 is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

Since the changes in the start winning process 2 are the same as those in the start winning process 1, description thereof is omitted. The difference from the start winning process 1 is that the value N2 of the reserved ball counter and the pre-reading process flag information 2 are used.

Next, the prefetch process 1 will be described.
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the prefetch process 1 executed by the main controller 162.

The MPU 310 executes the prefetch process 1 in FIG. 47 instead of the prefetch process 1 in FIG.
When the prefetch process 1 is executed in step S530, as shown in FIG. 47, the process proceeds to step S800.

In step S800, it is determined whether or not any bit in the position corresponding to the numerical range that can be taken by the value N1 of the reserved ball number counter in the pre-reading flag information 1 is on,
If it is determined that any of the bits is turned on (YES), it is determined that the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84a is being executed, and the process proceeds to step S826.

In step S826, the unprocessed prefetch determination value 1 and the prefetch pending ball count 1 are read from the RAM 314, and the process proceeds to step S804. And steps S804, S806, S8
The processes of 08, S810, and S812 are executed in that order, and the process proceeds to step S828.

In step S828, the bit at the position corresponding to the pre-reading pending ball number 1 read in step S826 in the pre-reading processing flag information 1 is turned off, the series of processing ends, and the original processing is restored.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S804 that it is not a big hit (NO), step S816 is performed.
Migrate to

In step S816, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit, and if it is determined that it is a small hit (YES), the process proceeds to step S818. And the process of step S818 and S820 is performed in that order, and it transfers to step S810.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S816 that it is not a small hit (NO), step S822 is performed.
Migrate to Then, the processes of steps S822 and S824 are executed in that order,
Move to 810.

Note that the changes in the prefetching process 2 are the same as in the prefetching process 1, and will not be described.
The difference from the prefetch process 1 is that the prefetch process flag information 2, the prefetch determination value 2, and the prefetch pending ball count 2
It is a point to use.

[Operation] Next, the operation of the present embodiment will be described.
If there is a winning at the start winning opening 84a, the value N1 of the reserved ball counter is added through step S304. Next, through steps S316, S312, and S314, the bit at the position corresponding to the value N1 of the reserved ball number counter in the prefetching flag information 1 is turned on, and the values of various random number counters are set as the prefetch determination value 1. The value N1 of the reserved ball number counter is stored in the RAM 314 as the prefetched reserved ball number 1, respectively. And step S826, S804
After that, the unprocessed prefetch determination value 1 and the prefetch pending ball count 1 are read, and the prefetch effect lottery 1 is based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 included in the read prefetch determination value 1. Done.
If it is determined that the jackpot is determined in the pre-reading effect lottery 1, the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the jackpot is read through steps S806 and S808, and the variation pattern is determined based on the read variation pattern table 406. . Then, through step S 810, a prefetch command for designating the determined variation pattern and the read prefetch pending ball count of 1 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143.

On the other hand, if there is a winning at the starting winning opening 84a during the pre-reading effect process of the starting winning opening 84a, the value N1 of the reserved ball counter is further added through step S304. Next, through steps S316, S312, and S314, the bit at the position corresponding to the value N1 of the reserved ball number counter in the prefetching flag information 1 is turned on, and the values of various random number counters are set as the prefetch determination value 1. , The value N1 of the reserved ball number counter is set to 1 as the prefetched reserved ball number.
Stored in 314. Then, through steps S826 and S804, the unprocessed prefetch determination value 1 and the prefetch pending ball count 1 are read, and based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the read prefetch determination value 1 A pre-reading effect lottery 1 is performed. If it is determined that the jackpot is determined in the pre-reading effect lottery 1, the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the jackpot is read through steps S806 and S808, and the variation pattern is determined based on the read variation pattern table 406. . Then, through step S810, a pre-read command for designating the determined variation pattern and the number of pre-read hold balls read out is a voice lamp control device 143.
Sent to.

It should be noted that the pre-reading effect process for the start winning opening 84b is similarly executed in a similar manner for the winning at the starting winning opening 84b.

[Effects] In this way, in the present embodiment, the processing for the next winning of the start winning opening 84a is executed even during the execution of the pre-reading effect process of the starting winning opening 84a.

Thereby, since the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84a can be surely executed for each winning at the starting winning opening 84a, a big hit is generated even though a certain winning at the starting winning opening 84a becomes a big win. It is possible to prevent a problem that the effect of notifying the fact is not performed. Further, it is possible to prevent a problem that the reserved ball of the start winning opening 84a is not displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the processing for the next winning of the start winning opening 84b is executed even during the execution of the pre-reading effect process of the starting winning opening 84b.

Thereby, since the pre-reading effect processing of the start winning opening 84b can be surely executed for each winning at the starting winning opening 84b, a big hit is generated even though a certain winning at the starting winning opening 84b becomes a big win. It is possible to prevent a problem that the effect of notifying the fact is not performed. Further, it is possible to prevent a problem that the reserved ball of the start winning opening 84b is not displayed.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. 48 and 49
These are figures which show 4th Embodiment of the game machine which concerns on this invention.

The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that processing is distributed to timer interrupt processing and main processing when a probability variation state occurs. Hereinafter, only different parts from the first embodiment will be described, and overlapping parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the start winning process 1 will be described.
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 1 executed by the main controller 162.

The MPU 310 executes the start winning process 1 in FIG. 48 instead of the start winning process 1 in FIG.

When the start winning process 1 is executed in the MPU 310, the process proceeds to step S300 as shown in FIG. Steps S300, S302, S304, S306, S
The processes of 308, S310, S312, and S314 are executed in that order, and the process proceeds to step S318.

In step S318, it is determined whether or not it is in the state of probability change. If it is determined that the state is in the state of probability change (YES), the process proceeds to step S320 to indicate whether or not to perform the prefetch process 1 as the main process. The prefetch process execution flag is turned on, a series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S318 that the state is not the probability variation state (NO), step S530 is performed.
Then, the prefetch process 1 is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

Since the changes in the start winning process 2 are the same as those in the start winning process 1, description thereof is omitted. The difference from the start winning process 1 is that the value N2 of the reserved ball counter and the pre-reading process flag information 2 are used.

Next, the main process will be described.
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by main controller 162.

The MPU 310 executes the main process of FIG. 49 instead of the main process of FIG.
When the main process is executed in the MPU 310, as shown in FIG.
500. And step S500, S502, S504, S506, S50
8, S510, S512 are executed in that order, and the process proceeds to step S534.

In step S534, it is determined whether or not the prefetch process execution flag is on. If it is determined that the prefetch process execution flag is on (YES), prefetch processes 1 and 2 are set as the main processes. It determines with performing, it transfers to step S530, the prefetch process 1 is performed, and step S5
32, the prefetch process 2 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S514.

In step S514, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is turned off. If it is determined that the power failure flag is turned off (YES), it is determined that the power is not shut off and the process proceeds to step S516. To do. And the process of step S516, S518, S520 is performed in that order, and it transfers to step S514.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S514 that the power failure flag is on (NO), it is determined that a power interruption has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S522. And step S522,
The processes of S524, S526, and S528 are executed in that order, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S534 that the prefetch process execution flag is off (N
O) moves to step S514.

[Operation] Next, the operation of the present embodiment will be described.
If there is a winning at the start winning opening 84a, the value N1 of the reserved ball counter is added through step S304. Next, through steps S308 to S314, the prefetching processing flag 1 is turned on, the values of the various random number counters are set as the prefetch determination value 1, and the value N1 of the reserved ball number counter is set as the number of prefetched reserved balls 1. Stored in At this time, if the probability variation state has not occurred, the prefetch determination value 1 and the prefetch hold ball number 1 are read through steps S802 and S804, and the jackpot included in the read prefetch determination value 1 Random number counter C1
The pre-reading effect lottery 1 is performed based on the value of. When it is determined that the jackpot is in the pre-reading effect lottery 1,
Through steps S806 and S808, the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the jackpot is read out, and the variation pattern is determined based on the read variation pattern table 406. Then, through step S 810, a prefetch command for designating the determined variation pattern and the read prefetch pending ball count of 1 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143.
The processes in steps S308 to S314 and S800 to S824 are executed as a timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, when the probability change state has occurred, the prefetch process execution flag is turned on through step S320, and the processes of steps S800 to S824 are executed as the main process.

Similarly, for the winning to the start winning opening 84b, when the probability variation state has not occurred, the processes of steps S358 to S364 and S850 to S874 are executed as timer interrupt processing, but the probability variation state has occurred. If so, the processing of steps S850 to S874 is executed as the main processing.

[Effect] In this way, in this embodiment, when the probability variation state has occurred, the processing of steps S308 to S314 is executed as the timer interrupt processing, and steps S800 to S8 are performed.
The process 24 is executed as the main process.

In the probability variation state, in the jackpot lottery and the pre-reading effect lottery 1, the jackpot random number counter C
Since the value of 1 and a plurality of (14) jackpot values are respectively compared, the number of comparisons is larger than in the non-probability variation state, and the processing load increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation state occurs, the processing is distributed to the timer interrupt processing and the main processing, so that the timer interrupt processing does not end within the interrupt cycle. It can be prevented from occurring. In other cases, processing is not distributed to timer interrupt processing and main processing, so that processing delays are prevented and arguments are passed between timer interrupt processing and main processing. It is possible to prevent a problem caused by the occurrence of the failure.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation state has occurred, steps S358 to S3 are performed.
The process of 64 is executed as a timer interrupt process, and the process of steps S850 to S874 is executed as a main process.

In the probability variation state, in the jackpot lottery and the pre-reading effect lottery 2, the jackpot random number counter C
Since the value of 1 and a plurality of (14) jackpot values are respectively compared, the number of comparisons is larger than in the non-probability variation state, and the processing load increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation state occurs, the processing is distributed to the timer interrupt processing and the main processing, so that the timer interrupt processing does not end within the interrupt cycle. It can be prevented from occurring. In other cases, processing is not distributed to timer interrupt processing and main processing, so that processing delays are prevented and arguments are passed between timer interrupt processing and main processing. It is possible to prevent a problem caused by the occurrence of the failure.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, only when the probability change state has occurred, the prefetching process execution flag is turned on, and when the prefetching process execution flag is off, the prefetching process 1 and the prefetching process in the main process are performed. Reading process 2 is not executed.

If the prefetch process execution flag is not provided, or if the probability change state has not occurred, the prefetch process 1 and the prefetch process 2 in the main process are not executed. In this case, in the main process, the process of step S800 and the step Since it is necessary to execute the processing of S850, the processing load increases.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the prefetch process execution flag is off, the prefetch process 1 and the prefetch process 2 in the main process are not executed, so one process (step S5).
34), both the prefetch process 1 and the prefetch process 2 can be skipped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the probability variation state does not occur.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a fifth embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

This embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that the timer interruption is performed when the number of reserved balls at the start winning opening 84a or the starting winning opening 84b is stored when the change display of the effect design is finished. The difference is that processing is distributed to processing and main processing. Hereinafter, only the parts different from the fourth embodiment will be described, and overlapping parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the start winning process 1 will be described.
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 1 executed by the main controller 162.

The MPU 310 executes the start winning process 1 in FIG. 50 instead of the start winning process 1 in FIG.

When the start winning process 1 is executed in the MPU 310, the process proceeds to step S300 as shown in FIG. Steps S300, S302, S304, S306, S
The processes of 308, S310, S312, and S314 are executed in that order, and the process proceeds to step S322.

In step S322, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the production symbol variation display,
When it is determined that it is the start timing of the effect symbol variation display (YES), step S320 is performed.
If not (NO), the process moves to step S530.

Since the changes in the start winning process 2 are the same as those in the start winning process 1, description thereof is omitted. The difference from the start winning process 1 is that the value N2 of the reserved ball counter and the pre-reading process flag information 2 are used.

[Operation] Next, the operation of the present embodiment will be described.
If there is a winning at the start winning opening 84a, the value N1 of the reserved ball counter is added through step S304. Next, through steps S308 to S314, the prefetching processing flag 1 is turned on, the values of the various random number counters are set as the prefetch determination value 1, and the value N1 of the reserved ball number counter is set as the number of prefetched reserved balls 1. Stored in At this time, if it is not the start timing of the production symbol variation display (big hit lottery), steps S802 and S804.
Then, the prefetch determination value 1 and the prefetch pending ball count 1 are read, and the prefetch effect lottery 1 is performed based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 included in the read prefetch determination value 1. If it is determined that the jackpot is determined in the pre-reading effect lottery 1, the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the jackpot is read through steps S806 and S808, and the read variation pattern table 40 is read out.
6 is used to determine the variation pattern. Then, through step S 810, a prefetch command for designating the determined variation pattern and the read prefetch pending ball count of 1 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143. The processes in steps S308 to S314 and S800 to S824 are executed as a timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if it is the start timing of the variation display of the production symbol, after step S320,
The prefetch process execution flag is turned on, and the processes in steps S800 to S824 are executed as the main process.

Similarly, for the winning to the start winning opening 84b, if it is not the start timing of the change display of the effect symbol, the processes of steps S358 to S364 and S850 to S874 are executed as the timer interrupt process. If it is the start timing of the variable display, the processes of steps S850 to S874 are executed as the main process.

[Effects] In this way, in this embodiment, when the number of reserved balls in the start winning opening 84a is stored when the change display of the effect symbol is completed, the processing of steps S308 to S314 is interrupted by a timer. As a process, the processes in steps S800 to S824 are executed as a main process.

When the change display of the effect symbol is finished and the number of reserved balls of the start winning opening 84a is stored, the big hit lottery is performed, so the processing load increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the start winning opening 84 is displayed when the change display of the effect symbol is finished.
When the number of held balls of a is stored, the processing is distributed to the timer interrupt processing and the main processing, so that it is possible to prevent a problem that the timer interrupt processing does not end within the interrupt cycle. it can. In other cases, processing is not distributed to timer interrupt processing and main processing, so that processing delays are prevented and arguments are passed between timer interrupt processing and main processing. It is possible to prevent a problem caused by the occurrence of the failure.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls at the start winning opening 84b is stored when the change display of the effect symbol is completed, the processing of steps S358 to S364 is executed as a timer interruption processing. The process from S850 to S874 is executed as the main process.

When the change display of the effect symbol is finished and the number of reserved balls in the start winning opening 84b is stored, the big hit lottery is performed, so the processing load increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the start winning opening 84 is displayed when the change display of the effect symbol is finished.
When the number of held balls of b is stored, the processing is distributed to the timer interrupt processing and the main processing, so that it is possible to prevent a problem that the timer interrupt processing does not end within the interrupt cycle. it can. In other cases, processing is not distributed to timer interrupt processing and main processing, so that processing delays are prevented and arguments are passed between timer interrupt processing and main processing. It is possible to prevent a problem caused by the occurrence of the failure.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading process execution flag is turned on only when the number of reserved balls of the start winning opening 84b is stored when the display of the effect symbol is finished, and the pre-reading process execution flag is set. When it is off, the prefetch process 1 and the prefetch process 2 in the main process are not executed.

When the pre-reading process execution flag is not provided, if the number of reserved balls in the start winning opening 84b is not stored when the change display of the effect symbol is finished, the pre-reading process 1 and the pre-reading process 2 in the main process are executed. However, in this case, since it is necessary to execute the processing in step S800 and the processing in step S850 in the main processing, the processing load increases.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the prefetch process execution flag is off, the prefetch process 1 and the prefetch process 2 in the main process are not executed, so one process (step S5).
34), both the prefetch process 1 and the prefetch process 2 can be skipped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the number of reserved balls in the start winning opening 84b is not stored when the change display of the effect symbol is finished.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a sixth embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

The present embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that the processing is distributed to the timer interruption process and the main process when there is a winning at the starting winning port 84a and a winning at the starting winning port 84b. Is different. Hereinafter, only the parts different from the fourth embodiment will be described, and overlapping parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the start winning process 1 will be described.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 1 executed by the main controller 162.

The MPU 310 executes the start winning process 1 in FIG. 51 instead of the start winning process 1 in FIG.

When the start winning process 1 is executed in the MPU 310, the process proceeds to step S300 as shown in FIG. Steps S300, S302, S304, S306, S
The processes of 308, S310, S312, and S314 are executed in that order, and the process proceeds to step S324.

In step S324, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the start winning opening 84b based on the detection information in the RAM 314, and if it is determined that a game ball has won the start winning opening 84b (YES).
Moves to step S320, but if it is not (NO), step S53
Move to 0.

Since the changes in the start winning process 2 are the same as those in the start winning process 1, description thereof is omitted. The difference from the start winning process 1 is that the value N2 of the reserved ball counter and the pre-reading process flag information 2 are used.

[Operation] Next, the operation of the present embodiment will be described.
If there is a winning at the start winning opening 84a, the value N1 of the reserved ball counter is added through step S304. Next, through steps S308 to S314, the prefetching processing flag 1 is turned on, the values of the various random number counters are set as the prefetch determination value 1, and the value N1 of the reserved ball number counter is set as the number of prefetched reserved balls 1. Stored in At this time, if there is no winning at the start winning opening 84b, the prefetch determination value 1 and the prefetch hold ball number 1 are read through steps S802 and S804, and the read prefetch determination value 1 is obtained. A pre-reading effect lottery 1 is performed based on the value of the included jackpot random number counter C1. If it is determined that the jackpot is determined in the pre-reading effect lottery 1, the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the jackpot is read through steps S806 and S808, and the variation pattern is determined based on the read variation pattern table 406. . Then, through step S 810, a prefetch command for designating the determined variation pattern and the read prefetch pending ball count of 1 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143. The processes in steps S308 to S314 and S800 to S824 are executed as a timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if there is a winning at the start winning opening 84b, the prefetch process execution flag is turned on through step S320, and the processes of steps S800 to S824 are executed as the main process.

As for the winning at the start winning opening 84b, similarly, when there is no winning at the starting winning opening 84b, the processes of steps S358 to S364 and S850 to S874 are executed as timer interruption processes. If there is a winning at the winning opening 84b, step S850-
The process of S874 is executed as the main process.

[Effects] In this way, in the present embodiment, when there is a winning at the start winning opening 84a and a winning at the starting winning opening 84b, steps S308 to S314, S358 to S36.
4 is executed as a timer interrupt process, and steps S800 to S824 and S850 to S8 are executed.
The process 74 is executed as the main process.

When there is a winning at the start winning opening 84a and a winning at the starting winning opening 84b, the pre-reading effect lotteries 1 and 2 are performed, so the processing load increases.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when there is a winning at the starting winning port 84a and a winning at the starting winning port 84b, the processing is distributed to the timer interrupt processing and the main processing. Can be prevented from occurring in such a manner that does not end within the interrupt cycle. In other cases, processing is not distributed to timer interrupt processing and main processing, so that processing delays are prevented and arguments are passed between timer interrupt processing and main processing. It is possible to prevent a problem caused by the occurrence of the failure.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading process execution flag is turned on and the pre-reading process execution flag is turned off only when there is a winning at the starting winning port 84a and a winning at the starting winning port 84b. In this case, the prefetch process 1 and the prefetch process 2 in the main process are not executed.

When the pre-reading process execution flag is not provided, winning to the start winning opening 84a and starting winning opening 84
If there is no winning in b, the prefetch process 1 and the prefetch process 2 in the main process are not executed. However, in this case, it is necessary to execute the process in step S800 and the process in step S850 in the main process. , Processing load increases.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the prefetch process execution flag is off, the prefetch process 1 and the prefetch process 2 in the main process are not executed, so one process (step S5).
34), both the prefetch process 1 and the prefetch process 2 can be skipped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when there is no winning at the start winning opening 84a and no winning at the starting winning opening 84b.

[Seventh Embodiment]
Next, a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. 52 and 53
These are figures which show 7th Embodiment of the game machine which concerns on this invention.

The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a mission effect is performed as an effect of notifying that a big hit will occur. The mission effect is as if a game state advantageous to the player occurs when the player achieves the mission contents in the game by presenting a predetermined mission to the player during the change display of the effect symbol. An effect that gives an impression. Hereinafter, only different parts from the first embodiment will be described, and overlapping parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the prefetch command process in step S1506 will be described.
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing prefetch command processing executed by the display control device 302.

The MPU 370 executes the prefetch command process of FIG. 52 instead of the prefetch command process of FIG.

The prefetch command process is a process for processing a prefetch command. When the prefetch command process is executed in step S1506, the process proceeds to step S1600 as shown in FIG. Then, the processes of steps S1600, S1602, S1604, and S1606 are executed in that order, and the process proceeds to step S1608.

In step S1608, time data corresponding to the variation pattern acquired in step S1602 is acquired from the variation pattern command management table 408, and the variation time for the variation display of the effect symbol display device 91 is stored, so that the prefetching acquired in step S1604 is stored. The acquired time data is stored in the work RAM 374 in association with the number of reserved balls, and a series of processing is terminated and the original processing is restored.

Next, the display setting process in step S1402 will be described.
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the display control device 302.

The MPU 370 executes the display setting process of FIG. 53 instead of the display setting process of FIG.
The display setting process is a process for performing display setting of the effect symbol display device 91, and includes step S1.
When executed in 402, the process proceeds to step S2100 as shown in FIG. Then, the processes of steps S2100 and S2102 are executed in that order, and the process proceeds to step S2124.

In step S2124, it is determined whether or not the mission effect flag indicating whether the mission effect is being executed is turned off. If it is determined that the mission effect flag is turned off (YES), the mission effect flag is turned off. It is determined that the performance is not being executed, and the process proceeds to step S2126.

In step S2126, based on the held ball number determination information, it is determined whether or not any of the current held balls is a big hit, and if it is determined that any of the held balls is a big hit (YES), The process moves to step S2128.

In step S2128, in order to obtain the variation time from the start of the next variation display until the variation display related to the holding ball that will be the biggest jackpot ends, among the time data stored in step S1608, the most recent jackpot. The time data corresponding to the reserved ball and the previous reserved ball is read from the work RAM 374. For example, when it is determined that the second holding ball is a big hit, the time data corresponding to the first and second holding balls is read.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2130, and based on the current value of the time counter and the read time data, the time from the present to the end of the variable display related to the holding ball that is the biggest jackpot is calculated as the mission time. . According to the current value of the time counter, the remaining fluctuation time of the current fluctuation display is known, and according to the read time data, the fluctuation display related to the holding ball that is the biggest jackpot from the start of the next fluctuation display is performed. Since the fluctuation time until the end is known, by adding these, it is possible to calculate the time from the present until the end of the fluctuation display related to the holding ball that will be the biggest jackpot. For example, when it is determined that the second holding ball is a big hit, the remaining fluctuation time of the current fluctuation display is 3.2 [s], the fluctuation time relating to the first holding ball is 10.0 [s], Fluctuation time related to the second holding ball is 20.0 [
In the case of s], the mission time is calculated as 3.2 + 10.0 + 20.0 = 33.2 [s].

Next, the process proceeds to step S2132 to display a message (mission) indicating that the jackpot symbol should be aligned together with the calculated mission time. Therefore, mission effect image data for constructing a display image of the mission effect is displayed in a predetermined area of the work RAM 374. Expand to. For example, when the mission time is 33.2 [s], the mission effect image data is developed so that “[mission] 33.2 seconds, arrange the jackpot symbols within 3! Seconds” is displayed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2134, the mission effect flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step S2136.

In step S2136, it is determined whether or not the mission effect flag is turned on.
If it is determined that the mission effect flag is on (YES), it is determined that the mission effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S2138, the mission time is subtracted, and the process proceeds to step S2140.

In step S2140, the mission effect image data developed in the predetermined area of the work RAM 374 is updated to display a message indicating that the jackpot symbol should be aligned along with the subtracted mission time. For example, when the remaining mission time is 28.2 [s], the mission effect image data is updated so that “[Mission] arrange the jackpot symbols within 28.2 seconds!” Is displayed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2142 to determine whether or not the mission time is “0” or less. If it is determined that the mission time is “0” or less (YES), step S214 is performed.
The process shifts to 4, the mission effect flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S2106.

Steps S2106, S2108, S2110, S2112, S2114, S
The processes of 2116, S2118, S2120, and S2122 are executed in that order, and the series of processes is terminated to return to the original process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2142 that the mission time is longer than “0” (N
O) moves to step S2106.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2136 that the mission effect flag is off (NO), it is determined that the mission effect is not being executed, and the process proceeds to step S2106.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2126 that any of the reserved balls is not a big hit (NO), the process proceeds to step S2104.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2124 that the mission effect flag is on (NO), it is determined that the mission effect is being executed, and the process proceeds to step S2138.

[Operation] Next, the operation of the present embodiment will be described.
In main controller 162, when the winning symbol is variably displayed and there is a winning at start winning opening 84a, a prefetch command for designating the variation pattern and the number of prefetched reserved balls 1 read out. Is sent.

When receiving the prefetch command, the display control device 302 receives steps S1600 to S160.
6, the prefetch command flag is turned on, the fluctuation pattern and the prefetch hold ball number 1 are acquired from the received prefetch command, and the hold ball number discrimination information is set. Step S16
Through time 08, time data corresponding to the acquired variation pattern is acquired, and the acquired time data is stored in the work RAM 374.

When the prefetch command flag is turned on, it is determined through step S2126 whether or not any of the reserved balls is a big hit. As a result, if it is determined that it is a big hit,
Through steps S2128 to S2132, based on the current value of the clock counter and the read time data, the mission time from the present to the end of the variable display related to the holding ball that is the biggest jackpot is calculated. A message that the jackpot symbol should be aligned with the mission time is displayed. During mission production, after step S2140,
A message that the jackpot symbol should be aligned with the remaining mission time continues to be displayed.

As a result of the determination in step S2126, if it is determined that it is not a big hit, step S2126
After 2104, the reserved ball number image data is developed based on the reserved ball number discriminating information, and the reserved ball symbol is displayed based on the developed reserved ball number image data.

The same operation is performed when there is a winning at the start winning opening 84b.
[Effect] Thus, in this embodiment, as an effect of notifying that a jackpot will occur, the jackpot symbol is displayed together with the mission time from the present until the end of the variable display related to the holding ball that will be the jackpot. Display a message to align.

Thereby, the player is enthusiastic about the game to arrange the jackpot symbol within the given mission time, and the jackpot symbol is actually arranged, so that the game can be improved.

[Other Embodiments]
In the second embodiment, step S206 is performed after step S506.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing in step S506 may be executed after the processing in steps S206 and S208. Even in this case, steps S608 to S61 are performed.
Since the processing No. 4 is provided, it is possible to prevent the number of reserved balls in the start winning opening 84a from differing from the number of pre-reading reserved balls 1 in the RAM 314. Similarly, since the processing of steps S624 to S630 is provided, it is possible to prevent the number of reserved balls in the start winning opening 84b from differing from the number of prefetched reserved balls 2 in the RAM 314.

In the first to third embodiments, the pre-reading effect process of the start winning port 84a and the pre-reading effect process of the start winning port 84b are distributed to the timer interrupt process and the main process. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Only the pre-reading effect process of the start winning port 84a may be distributed to the timer interruption process and the main process, or only the pre-reading effect process of the start winning port 84b may be distributed to the timer interrupt process and the main process. Good.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the start winning opening 84 is used when the probability variation state has occurred.
The pre-reading effect process of a and the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84b are distributed to the timer interrupt process and the main process. It may be distributed to the main process, or only the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84b may be distributed to the timer interrupt process and the main process.

In the fourth embodiment, the process in step S800 and step S850 are performed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these processes may not be provided. Thereby, when the probability variation state has occurred, both the prefetch process 1 and the prefetch process 2 are executed through the process of step S534, so that the determination process can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the number of reserved balls in the start winning opening 84a is stored when the change display of the effect symbol is finished, the prefetch effect processing of the starting winning opening 84a is interrupted by a timer. When the display change of the production symbol is finished, the start winning opening 84 is distributed to the processing and the main processing.
When the number of held balls of b is stored, the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84b is distributed to the timer interruption process and the main process, but not limited to this, only the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84a May be distributed to the timer interrupt process and the main process, or only the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84b may be distributed to the timer interrupt process and the main process.

In the fifth embodiment, the process in step S800 and step S850 are performed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these processes may not be provided. Thereby, when the change display of the production symbol is finished, when the number of held balls of the start winning opening 84a is stored,
Since both the prefetch process 1 and the prefetch process 2 are executed through the process of step S534,
The determination process can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

The fifth embodiment can be combined with the fourth embodiment.
That is, at least one of the cases where the number of held balls of the start winning opening 84a is stored when (1) the probability variation state has occurred and (2) when the change display of the effect symbol has been completed (( In the case of 1), in the case of (2), in the cases of (1) and (2)), the pre-reading effect process of the start winning port 84a and the pre-reading effect process of the start winning port 84b are the timer interrupt process and the main process. To disperse.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, winning in the start winning opening 84a and starting winning opening 84 are described.
In the case of winning a prize b, the pre-reading effect process of the start winning port 84a and the pre-reading effect process of the start winning port 84b are distributed to the timer interruption process and the main process. Only the prefetch effect process 84a may be distributed to the timer interrupt process and the main process, or only the prefetch effect process of the start winning opening 84b may be distributed to the timer interrupt process and the main process.

In the sixth embodiment, the process of step S800 and step S850 are performed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these processes may not be provided. As a result, when there is a prize at the start prize opening 84a and a prize at the start prize opening 84b, step S53 is performed.
Since both the prefetch process 1 and the prefetch process 2 are executed through the process of 4, the determination process can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

The sixth embodiment can be combined with the fourth and fifth embodiments. That is, (1) when the probability change state is generated, (2) when the change display of the effect symbol is finished, when the number of held balls of the start winning opening 84a is stored, and (3) the starting winning opening 84a In the case of at least one of the cases where there is a prize to the winning prize and the winning prize opening 84b (in the case of (1), in the case of (2), in the case of (3), in the case of (1) and (2), (1
) And (3), (2) and (3), (1), (2) and (3)), the pre-reading effect processing of the start winning opening 84a and the start winning opening 84b The reading effect process is distributed to the timer interrupt process and the main process.

Further, in the fourth to sixth embodiments, the prefetch process execution flag is provided and the execution of the prefetch processes 1 and 2 in the main process is controlled. 2
Thus, the execution of the prefetch processes 1 and 2 in the main process can be controlled, so that the processes in steps S320, S534, and S536 need not be provided.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the time from the present until the end of the variable display related to the holding ball that is the biggest jackpot is displayed as the mission time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined reference time (for example, The time from the start of the next change display) until the end of the change display related to the holding ball that is the biggest jackpot can be displayed as the mission time.

In the seventh embodiment, a message indicating that the jackpot symbol should be arranged is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any content may be used as long as the content indicates a mission.
For example, a game to eat sushi is started, and “[Mission] 1 sushi within 33.2 seconds.
Eat 0 dishes! ! "Can also be displayed.

In the seventh embodiment, the mission effect is performed when a big hit occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but the non-probable big hit, the probable big hit, the JUB big hit, the sudden big hit,
A mission effect can also be performed when either a potential big hit or a small hit occurs. Further, even if the reach is out of reach or out of reach, the mission effect may be performed.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the pre-reading effect process of the start winning port 84a and the pre-reading effect process of the start winning port 84b are distributed to the timer interrupt process and the main process. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The entire pre-reading effect process for the start winning opening 84a may be executed as the main process, or the pre-reading effect process for the start winning opening 84b may be executed as the main process.

As a result, when the change display of the production symbol is finished, the number of reserved balls in the start winning opening 84a or the starting winning opening 84b is stored, and the winning in the starting winning opening 84a and the winning in the starting winning opening 84b are also performed. Even if there is a failure, the timer interruption process is more reliably completed within the interruption cycle, so that it is possible to further prevent problems.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the pre-reading effect process of the start winning port 84a and the pre-reading effect process of the start winning port 84b are distributed to the main process which is the timer interrupt process and the interrupted process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first interrupt process and the second interrupt process that is interrupted during the execution of the first interrupt process can also be distributed.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the prefetch effect lottery 1 (the process of step S804) is executed as the main process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the processing load of the timer interrupt process, A part of the reading effect lottery 1 can be executed as a timer interruption process, and the remaining part of the pre-reading effect lottery 1 can be executed as a main process. When the comparison with the jackpot value occurs 14 times as the pre-reading effect lottery 1, if the processing load of the timer interrupt process is large, for example, four comparison processes are executed as the timer interrupt process, and the remaining 10 times The comparison process is executed as the main process. On the other hand, when the processing load of the timer interrupt process is small, 14 comparison processes are executed as the timer interrupt process. The processing load of the timer interruption process is, for example, whether or not a probability variation state has occurred, whether or not the number of held balls of the start winning slot 84a is stored when the change display of the effect symbol is completed, The determination can be made based on whether or not there is a winning in 84a and a winning in the start winning opening 84b.

As a result, the processing load of the timer interruption process can be controlled, so that only when the timer interruption process does not end within the interruption period, the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84a is the timer interruption process and the main process. To be distributed. Therefore, in other cases, since the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84a is not distributed to the timer interrupt process and the main process, the delay of the process is prevented and the timer interrupt process and the main process It is possible to prevent a problem caused by the passing of arguments and the like between them.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the prefetch effect lottery 2 (the process of step S854) is executed as the main process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the processing load of the timer interrupt process, A part of the reading effect lottery 2 can be executed as a timer interruption process, and the remaining part of the pre-reading effect lottery 2 can be executed as a main process. When the comparison with the jackpot value occurs 14 times as the pre-reading effect lottery 2, if the processing load of the timer interruption process is large, for example, four comparison processes are executed as the timer interruption process, and the remaining 10 times The comparison process is executed as the main process. On the other hand, when the processing load of the timer interrupt process is small, 14 comparison processes are executed as the timer interrupt process. The processing load of the timer interruption process is, for example, whether or not a probability change state has occurred, whether or not the number of held balls of the start winning opening 84b is stored when the change display of the effect symbol is completed, The determination can be made based on whether or not there is a winning in 84a and a winning in the start winning opening 84b.

As a result, the processing load of the timer interruption process can be controlled, so that only when the timer interruption process does not end within the interruption period, the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84b is the timer interruption process and the main process. To be distributed. Therefore, in other cases, since the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84b is not distributed to the timer interrupt process and the main process, the delay of the process is prevented and the timer interrupt process and the main process It is possible to prevent a problem caused by the passing of arguments and the like between them.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84a is determined using the pre-reading process flag 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. Whether or not the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84a is being executed by determining the data in the storage area of the RAM 314 in which the pre-read determination value 1 or the pre-read hold ball number 1 is stored without using the middle flag 1 Can be determined. In this case, in the process of step S812, the storage area of the RAM 314 in which the prefetch determination value 1 or the prefetch pending ball count 1 is stored is a value that the prefetch judgment value 1 or the prefetch pending ball count 1 cannot take (for example, , “FF”).

In the first to seventh embodiments, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84b is determined using the pre-reading process flag 2, but the present invention is not limited to this. Whether or not the pre-reading effect process of the start winning opening 84b is being executed by determining the data in the storage area of the RAM 314 in which the pre-read determination value 2 or the pre-read hold ball number 2 is stored without using the middle flag 2 Can be determined. In this case, in the process of step S862, the storage area of the RAM 314 in which the prefetch determination value 2 or the prefetch pending ball count 2 is stored is a value that the prefetch judgment value 2 or the prefetch pending ball count 2 cannot take (for example, , “FF”).

In the first to seventh embodiments, when the detection information obtained by executing the timer interruption process three times is “011”, the game ball is placed in the start winning opening 84a or the starting winning opening 84b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the detection information is “01” or “1”, it can be determined that the game ball has won the start winning opening 84a or the starting winning opening 84b. In this case, a timer interrupt process is executed during the execution of the prefetch processes 1 and 2, and the start winning opening 84
There is a possibility that the holding ball of the a or the start winning opening 84b is not displayed. In order to prevent this, the prohibition of the timer interruption process is set at the start of the execution of the pre-reading processes 1 and 2. In addition, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the interrupt permission of the timer interrupt process is set at the end of execution of the prefetch processes 1 and 2. Instead of this, a process for transmitting a command for designating the number of balls to be held in the start winning opening 84a for each winning in the starting winning opening 84a, and a start winning opening 84b for each winning in the starting winning opening 84b. A process of transmitting a command for designating the number of balls to be held is executed separately from the pre-reading processes 1 and 2, and the display control device 302 holds the balls to be held at the start winning opening 84a or the starting winning opening 84b based on these commands. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the number is displayed on the effect symbol display device 91.

In the first to seventh embodiments, it is determined that the game ball has won the start winning opening 84a or the starting winning opening 84b based on the detection information obtained by executing the timer interruption process three times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the detection information obtained by executing the timer interrupt process once or twice, or the detection information obtained by executing the timer interrupt process four times or more, the start winning opening 84a Alternatively, it can be determined that a game ball has won the start winning opening 84b. When the determination is made based on the detection information obtained by executing the timer interrupt process four times or more, noise resistance can be further improved.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the execution time of the timer interrupt process is not particularly described. However, in the first, third to seventh embodiments, the maximum execution of the timer interrupt process is not described. The time (the time required from the start of execution to the end of execution when the processing load of the timer interrupt process is the largest) is, for example, 1. with a predetermined margin with respect to the interrupt cycle (2 [ms]).
It is set to 5 [ms]. In the second embodiment, the maximum execution time of the timer interrupt process is set to, for example, 3.5 [ms] with a predetermined margin with respect to the interrupt cycle (4 [ms]). When the maximum execution time is not sufficient (for example, 1.9 [ms] or 3.9 [ms]), the timer interruption process is executed during the execution of the prefetch processes 1 and 2, and the start winning award 84a or While there is a possibility that the holding ball of the start winning opening 84b is not displayed, in order to prevent this, while setting the prohibition of the timer interruption process at the start of the execution of the prefetch processes 1 and 2, It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the interrupt permission of the timer interrupt process is set at the end of execution of the prefetch processes 1 and 2. Instead of this, a process for transmitting a command for designating the number of balls to be held in the start winning opening 84a for each winning in the starting winning opening 84a, and a start winning opening 84b for each winning in the starting winning opening 84b. A process for transmitting a command for designating the number of reserved balls is executed separately from the pre-reading processes 1 and 2, and the display control device 302 performs a start winning slot 8 based on these commands.
4a or the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls in the start winning opening 84b
The structure displayed in 1 can also be adopted.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the prefetching process 1 and the prefetching process 2 are executed in that order in the main process. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
When the B big hit or the sudden big hit is won, the reserved ball of the start winning opening 84b is preferentially digested. In that case, the pre-reading effect process of the starting winning opening 84b should be executed preferentially. Therefore, it is preferable to perform the prefetch process 2 and the prefetch process 1 in that order.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the main controller 162 transmits a 4-byte prefetch command including the variation pattern and the number of pre-reading reserved balls. It is also possible to transmit a 6-byte pre-read command comprising the number of reserved balls and the type of jackpot.

As a result, the display control device 302 can reliably identify the jackpot type from the look-ahead command, since it cannot distinguish whether the jackpot or jackpot is a non-probable big jackpot from the variation pattern corresponding to the non-probable big jackpot.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the value of the random number counter used for the jackpot lottery is stored in the first area of the RAM 314, and the value of the random number counter used for the pre-reading effect lottery 1 and 2 is stored. Although stored in the second area different from the first area of the RAM 314, due to the influence of noise or the like, the random number value stored in the first area of the RAM 314 in the big win lottery or the pre-reading effect lotteries 1 and 2 When the random number value stored in the second area of the RAM 314 is different, the following configuration can be adopted.

As a first configuration, a random number value stored in the first area of the RAM 314, and RA
One of the random number values stored in the second area of M314 is used for the big hit lottery and the pre-reading effect lotteries 1 and 2.

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the content of the pre-reading effect from being inconsistent with the content of the game that occurs thereafter.

As a second configuration, a gaming state determined based on a random number stored in the first area of the RAM 314 and a gaming state determined based on a random number stored in the second area of the RAM 314 The random number value that is more advantageous to the user is used for the jackpot lottery and the pre-reading effects lottery 1 and 2. For example, a jackpot determined based on a random number stored in the first area of the RAM 314 is defined as advantageous to the player in the order of probability jackpot, JUB jackpot, non-probability jackpot, rush jackpot and latent jackpot And the random number value which is advantageous among the jackpots determined based on the random numbers stored in the second area of the RAM 314 is used.

Thereby, even if the random number value stored in the first area of the RAM 314 differs from the random number value stored in the second area of the RAM 314 due to the influence of noise or the like, the disadvantage of the player is reduced. can do.

In the first to seventh embodiments, a predetermined notice symbol is displayed as an effect for notifying that a big hit will occur. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined character may be displayed. The background may be displayed, or the stop symbols may be displayed in a predetermined combination.

When a predetermined character is displayed, the predetermined character can be displayed in correspondence with the reserved ball symbol. However, the predetermined character can be displayed at an arbitrary position without corresponding to the reserved ball symbol. In the latter case, since the player cannot grasp which holding ball the big hit is generated, the player can have a big hit expectation for each holding ball. Therefore, the game taste can be improved.

When displaying the stop symbols in a predetermined combination, for example, when displaying the effect symbols on the effect symbol display device 91 in three vertical and three horizontal directions, positions that do not constitute the jackpot symbol (for example, upper left, upper center, and right) It is conceivable to display a predetermined effect symbol (for example, fish symbol) on the bottom. It is also conceivable that the left symbol and the middle symbol are displayed with the same number, such as “112”, “334”, and “778”, and the right symbol is displayed with a number “1” more than that.
As a result, when the left symbol and the middle symbol are aligned, but only the right symbol is shifted by one, it is possible to expect a big hit from each reserved ball. Therefore, the game taste can be improved.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the process of step S312 is performed by setting each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation pattern random number counter CS as the prefetch determination value 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the information determined by the jackpot random number counter C1 is transmitted as a prefetch command, the above values may not necessarily be stored. Further, if the information determined by the jackpot random number counter C1 and the reach random number counter C3 is transmitted as a prefetch command, the above values may not necessarily be stored.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the process of step S362 is performed by setting each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation pattern random number counter CS as the prefetch determination value 2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the information determined by the jackpot random number counter C1 is transmitted as a prefetch command, the above values may not necessarily be stored. Further, if the information determined by the jackpot random number counter C1 and the reach random number counter C3 is transmitted as a prefetch command, the above values may not necessarily be stored.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the process of step S312 stores each value such as the jackpot random number counter C1 as the prefetch determination value 1, but not limited to this, step S3
The value of the reserved ball storage area stored in the process of 06 may be copied and stored as the prefetch determination value 1.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the process of step S362 stores each value such as the jackpot random number counter C1 as the prefetch determination value 2, but not limited to this, step S3
The value in the reserved ball storage area stored in the process of 56 may be copied and stored as the prefetch determination value 2.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the process in step S802 is performed in step S802.
Although the prefetch determination value 1 stored in the process of 312 is read out, the present invention is not limited to this, and step S306 is performed.
The value of the reserved ball storage area stored in the above process may be read as the prefetch determination value 1. In this case, step S312 need not be provided.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the process in step S852 is performed in step S852.
Although the prefetch determination value 2 stored in the process 362 is read out, the present invention is not limited to this, and step S356 is performed.
The value of the reserved ball storage area stored in the process may be read as the prefetch determination value 2. In this case, step S362 need not be provided.

Further, in the first to seventh embodiments, each value of the random number counter used for the process of acquiring each value of the random number counter used for the jackpot lottery (the process of step S306) and the prefetch effect lottery 1 Is acquired as a timer interrupt process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the process of step S306 and the process of step S312 is a timer interrupt process, and the other is a main process. It may be executed.

Further, in the first to seventh embodiments, the process for determining winning to the start winning opening 84a (the process of step S300), the process of step S306, and the process of step S312 are executed as timer interrupt processes. Not limited to this, at least one of the process of step S300, the process of step S306, and the process of step S312 may be executed separately as a timer interrupt process and the rest as a main process.

Further, in the first to seventh embodiments, each value of the random number counter used for the process of acquiring each value of the random number counter used for the jackpot lottery (the process of step S356) and the prefetch effect lottery 2 Is acquired as a timer interrupt process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the process of step S356 and the process of step S362 is a timer interrupt process, and the other is a main process. It may be executed.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the process for determining winning to the start winning opening 84b (the process in step S350), the process in step S356, and the process in step S362 are executed as timer interrupt processes. Not limited to this, at least one of the process of step S350, the process of step S356, and the process of step S362 may be executed separately as a timer interrupt process and the rest as a main process.

Further, in the first to seventh embodiments, the main controller 162 determines that the number of pre-reading pending balls is 1 when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the jackpot value as a result of the prefetch effect lottery 1.
Is transmitted to the display control device 302, and the display control device 302 provides a predetermined advance notice at the display position corresponding to the prefetch hold ball number 1 in the effect symbol display device 91 based on the received prefetch command. Although the symbol is displayed, the main control device 162 is not limited to this, and the number of pre-reading balls is 1
The display control device 302 may not display a predetermined notice symbol without transmitting a prefetch command including For example, as a result of the pre-reading effect lottery 1, the main controller 162 determines that the jackpot random number counter C
When the value of 1 matches the jackpot value, a special variation pattern command is displayed on the display control device 3
The display control device 302 may perform display control related to the pre-reading effect based on the received variation pattern command.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the process of updating the value N1 of the holding ball counter (the process of step S304) and the number of balls held at the start winning opening 84a are stored in the RAM 314 as the number of pre-reading holding balls 1. The process to be performed (the process of step S314) is executed as a timer interrupt process, but not limited to this, one of the process of step S304 and the process of step S314 is executed as a timer interrupt process, and the other is executed separately as a main process. May be.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the process for determining a winning to the start winning opening 84a (the process of step S300), the process of step S304, and the process of step S314 are executed as timer interrupt processes. Not limited to this, at least one of the process of step S300, the process of step S304, and the process of step S314 may be separately executed as a timer interrupt process and the rest as a main process.

Further, in the first to seventh embodiments, the main controller 162 determines that the number of pre-reading reserved balls is 2 when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the jackpot value as a result of the prefetch effect lottery 2.
Is transmitted to the display control device 302, and the display control device 302 provides a predetermined notice to the display position corresponding to the pre-reading reserved ball number 2 in the effect symbol display device 91 based on the received pre-read command. Although the symbol is displayed, the main controller 162 is not limited to this,
The display control device 302 may not display a predetermined notice symbol without transmitting a prefetch command including For example, as a result of the prefetch effect lottery 2, the main controller 162 determines that the jackpot random number counter C
When the value of 1 matches the jackpot value, a special variation pattern command is displayed on the display control device 3
The display control device 302 may perform display control related to the pre-reading effect based on the received variation pattern command.

Further, in the first to seventh embodiments, the process of updating the value N2 of the reserved ball counter (the process of step S354) and the number of reserved balls at the start winning opening 84b are stored in the RAM 314 as the number of pre-reading reserved balls 2. The process to be performed (the process of step S364) is executed as a timer interrupt process, but not limited to this, one of the process of step S354 and the process of step S364 is executed separately as a timer interrupt process, and the other is executed separately as a main process. May be.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the process for determining winning to the start winning opening 84b (the process in step S350), the process in step S354, and the process in step S364 are executed as timer interrupt processes. Not limited to this, at least one of the process of step S350, the process of step S354, and the process of step S364 may be executed separately as a timer interrupt process, and the rest as a main process.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the processes in steps S306 and S356 are as follows.
The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation pattern random number counter CS are stored in the reserved ball storage area. Only each value may be stored. Further, only the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number counter C2 and the variation pattern random number counter CS may be stored.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the reach random number counter C3 is provided.
Not limited to this, the reach random number counter C3 may not be provided. In this case, step S70
4, the address of the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the jackpot, the determined jackpot type and the reserved ball number counter value N1 is acquired from the distribution structure table 404, and the variation pattern table 406 is read based on the acquired address. In step S716, the address of the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the value N1 of the small hit and the number of reserved balls is acquired from the distribution structure table 404, and the variation pattern table 406 is read based on the acquired address. In step S722, the address of the fluctuation pattern table 406 corresponding to the value N1 of the off and reserved ball number counter is acquired from the distribution structure table 404, and the fluctuation pattern table 406 is read based on the acquired address.

In the first to seventh embodiments, only one execution area of the reserved ball storage area corresponding to the start winning holes 84a and 84b is provided in common. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The execution area of the reserved ball storage area corresponding to the winning opening 84a and the starting winning opening 8
An execution area of the reserved ball storage area corresponding to 4b may be provided.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the confirmation command is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the confirmation command may not be provided. In this case, the display control device 302 can know the variation time of the effect symbol from the received variation pattern command, so that the effect symbol can be stopped and displayed in synchronization with the main control device 162 even if there is no confirmation command.

Further, in the first to seventh embodiments, in the short time state, control is performed so that the variation time of the production symbol is shorter than that in the normal state, and the winning chance to the start winning opening 84b is increased from that in the normal state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation time of the production symbol does not change from the normal state.
It is also possible to control so that only the chance to win 4b is increased from the normal state. In short, it is only necessary to at least suppress the digestion of the game ball in the short-time state.

Further, in the first to seventh embodiments, the stop type command is configured as a command for designating a non-reach out symbol, a non-reach symbol, a non-probable variation symbol, a probability variation symbol, or a random symbol. Alternatively, it can be configured as a command for designating symbols corresponding to a miss, big hit type, and small win. In this case, the stop type command is a command for specifying a stop symbol at the time of non-reach, a command for specifying a stop symbol at the time of non-reach, and a command for specifying a stop symbol at non-probable big hit A command for specifying a stop symbol for a probable jackpot, a command for specifying a stop symbol for a JUB jackpot, a command for specifying a stop symbol for a sudden jackpot, and a stop for a latent jackpot A command for designating a symbol and a command for designating a stop symbol at the time of a small hit are included.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the main control device 162 determines the stop symbol type, and the display control device 302 determines the specific content of the stop symbol. Not limited to this, the main controller 162 can be configured to determine the specific content of the stop symbol.

As a result, the display control device 302 does not need to determine the specific content of the stop symbol, so the processing load on the display control device 302 can be reduced. In addition, since the stop symbol table becomes unnecessary, the data capacity of the program ROM 372 can be reduced.

Also, in the first to seventh embodiments, there is no particular provision for the variation pattern table 406 that is commonly used for jackpot and miss, but the variation pattern table 4 that is commonly used for jackpot and miss.
06 can also be provided.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS,
The variation pattern is determined on the basis of a plurality of factors such as the value of the reach random number counter C3, whether the jackpot and miss, the type of jackpot, and the value N of the reserved ball counter, but not limited to these. The variation pattern may be determined based on at least one of the factors.

Further, in the first to seventh embodiments, the winning at the start winning opening 84a is set to be held up to four times at the maximum, but this is not restrictive, and the number of times is three times or less, or five times or more. It can also be set to hold until (for example, 8 times). Further, since the reserved ball symbol is displayed on the effect symbol display device 91, the hold lamp 95a may not be provided. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 93, it is not necessary to perform the lighting display by the holding lamp 95a.

Further, in the first to seventh embodiments, the winning at the start winning opening 84b is set to be suspended up to four times, but this is not limiting, and the number of times is three times or less, or five times or more. It can also be set to hold until (for example, 8 times). Moreover, since the reserved ball symbol is displayed on the effect symbol display device 91, the hold lamp 95b may not be provided. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 93, it is not necessary to perform the lighting display by the holding lamp 95b.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the passage of the through gate 85 is set to be suspended up to four times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of times is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, , 8 times) can also be set to hold. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 93, the hold lamp 96 may not be provided, and the hold lamp 96 may not perform the lighting display.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the normal symbol variation display is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of the lamp in the display unit 94a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special symbol display device is provided. 93 or effect symbol display device 91 can be used. Similarly, a lighting display corresponding to lighting of the hold lamp 96 may be performed by the effect symbol display device 91.

In the first to seventh embodiments, when a big win is reached, when the big winning opening 83a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time, and a game ball wins the big winning opening 83a,
Although five game balls are configured to be paid out as prize balls, the jackpot is not limited to this. When a big winning opening that is opened and closed separately from the big winning opening 83a is provided in the game area, and the jackpot is won, the big winning opening 83a is opened for a predetermined time, and when a game ball wins the big winning opening 83a,
A gaming state in which a large winning opening provided separately from the large winning opening 83a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times can be configured as a jackpot.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern random number counter CS. Instead, three variation type counters C are used.
The variation pattern can be determined using S1, CS2, and CS3.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “198”. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“198”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the variation type counter CS1, the initial value is set to “0”.

The variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “240”, for example. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“240”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the variation type counter CS2, the initial value is set to “0”.

Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, rough fluctuation times such as normal reach, super reach, and special reach are determined. Further, based on the value of the variation type counter CS2, a variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (medium symbol) is stopped and displayed after the reach effect is determined. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 302 determines the reach type of the effect symbol and the mode of detailed variation display. Therefore, by combining the variation type counters CS1 and CS2,
A wide variety of variation patterns can be easily realized. In addition, variation type counter CS
It is also possible to determine the mode of variation display by only 1 or to determine the mode of variation display similarly by the combination of the variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

The variation type counter CS3 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “162”. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“162”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the variation type counter CS3, the initial value is set to “0”.

In the effect symbol display device 91, in addition to the effect symbol change display, a notice effect that slides the effect display that is variably displayed or passes a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3.
Specifically, there is an effect pattern in which the time required for the notice effect is added to the change time, an effect pattern in which the change time is subtracted in order to shorten the change display time, or an effect pattern in which the change time is not added or subtracted. Selected. As with the variation pattern table 406, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of effect pattern tables with different ranges of random number counter values from which an effect pattern is selected. Each effect pattern table is configured such that the selection ratio of each effect pattern varies depending on whether the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a probable change state or a normal state, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

As the effect time addition / subtraction value, for example, based on the value of the variation type counter CS3, when the variation display time is not changed, when the variation display time is added by 1 second, when the variation display time is added by 2 seconds, Four types of addition / subtraction values are determined when the display time is subtracted by 1 second. In addition,
When the variation time is added or subtracted, a notice effect that increases the expected value of jackpot is performed on the effect symbol display device 91. In the case of a jackpot, since the probability that an added value of 2 seconds is selected is set high, the player can expect a jackpot by confirming the notice effect.

In this way, the variation time of the effect symbol is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final fluctuation time until the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is the fluctuation type counter C
Determined by S1, CS2, and CS3.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the variation pattern table 406 is determined regardless of the current gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern table is also determined according to the current gaming state. It can also be configured to determine 406.

In the probability variation state, since the jackpot is likely to occur, the range of the random number counter value corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is “10” to “238” so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary.
”And a wide variation pattern table 406 are selected, and non-reach out is easily selected.
In the fluctuation pattern table 406, the range of the random number counter value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of out-of-reach is narrowed to “0” to “9”, and it is difficult to select out-of-reach. Therefore,
In the probability variation state, it is difficult to select the reach effect, so the number of variable displays per unit time is increased, and a big hit is likely to occur early.

On the other hand, in the normal state, if a random number counter value is not stored in the reserved ball storage area, in order to secure the winning time of the game ball to the starting winning port 84a or the starting winning port 84b,
A variation pattern table 406 having a narrow range of random number counter values corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern “51” to “238” is selected, and non-reach variation is difficult to select. In the variation pattern table 406, the range of the random number counter value corresponding to the variation pattern of out-of-reach is wide as “9” to “50”, and out-of-reach is easily selected. Therefore, in the normal state, the winning time of the game ball to the start winning opening 84a or the starting winning opening 84b can be secured, so that the variable display is easily performed continuously on the effect symbol display device 91.

Further, in the first to seventh embodiments, the main control device 162 and the payout control device 24 are used.
2. The voice lamp control device 143, the display control device 302, and the effect symbol display device 91 are configured to transmit and receive data by an electrical signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the data is transmitted and received by optical communication. You can also. Also, it is not limited to wired communication,
Data can be transmitted and received by wireless communication using radio waves or infrared rays.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the sound lamp control device 143 is configured to control the display control device 302. Instead, the display control device 302 controls the sound lamp control device 143. It can also be configured to. Also, the sound lamp control device 1
43 and the display control device 302 may be replaced by a single control device having both functions of the sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the main control device 162 transmits a command to the sound lamp control device 143 so that the main control device 162 transmits the sound lamp control device 14.
3 is configured to indirectly control the display control device 302 via the main control device 162.
Can also be configured such that the main control device 162 directly controls the display control device 302 by transmitting the command directly to the display control device 302.

Further, in the first to seventh embodiments, the main controller 162 is configured to determine the variation pattern based on the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS.
The display control device 302 (or the sound lamp control device 143) has a variation pattern random number counter C
S may be provided so that the display control device 302 (or the sound lamp control device 143) determines the variation pattern based on the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS. A similar modification can be applied to the determination of the stop type. That is, the main controller 16
2, up to the variation pattern table 406 is determined based on the reach random number counter CS or the like, and the display control device 302 (or the sound lamp control device 143) determines the variation pattern based on the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS. In this case, the main controller 162 needs to determine the variation time for the variation display or the like of the special symbol display device 93. The variation time is determined based on the reach random number counter CS.

As a result, the main control device 162 does not need to determine the variation pattern, and therefore the processing load on the main control device 162 can be reduced.

Further, in the first to seventh embodiments, the effect symbol display device 91 is configured to perform the variable display of the effect symbol by scrolling the effect symbol in the vertical direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to perform a variation display of the effect symbol by scrolling the symbol in the horizontal direction or by moving and displaying the effect symbol along a predetermined route such as an L shape.

In the first to seventh embodiments, the present invention can be applied to other types of pachinko machines and the like. For example, a pachinko machine that unlocks a predetermined number of times when a game ball wins in a specific area of a special device, a pachinko machine that wins a bonus when a game ball wins a specific area of a special device, and other objects The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other types of pachinko machines equipped with the above. Further, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine or the like in which game balls are not lent through the ball lending device Y.

The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. For example, a slot machine is a known machine in which a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device that displays the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, and the operation means for starting (for example, the operation lever) is operated. As a trigger, the identification information variation display is started, the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) is triggered, or when a predetermined time elapses, the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed. When the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one, it becomes a slot machine that generates a special prize state that gives a player a predetermined game value. In this case, examples of game media include coins and medals.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused. As a basic concept of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, “a display device for confirming and displaying identification information after variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, For example, after a predetermined amount of game ball is inserted based on the operation of the button, the change display of the identification information is started by the operation of the start operation unit (for example, the operation lever), and the stop operation unit (for example, the stop) Button) or when a predetermined period of time has passed, the change display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and if the combination of the identification information at the time of the stop is a specific combination, A gaming machine that generates a special prize state that gives a predetermined gaming value. In this case, a large amount of game balls are paid out to the player in the lower tray.

The modification of the first embodiment includes other modifications of the first embodiment, the second embodiment and its modification, the third embodiment and its modification, and the fourth embodiment. The same applies to the embodiment and its modification, the fifth embodiment and its modification, the sixth embodiment and its modification, and the seventh embodiment and its modification. .

The modification of the second embodiment includes other modifications of the second embodiment, the first embodiment and its modification, the third embodiment and its modification, the fourth, The same applies to the embodiment and its modification, the fifth embodiment and its modification, the sixth embodiment and its modification, and the seventh embodiment and its modification. .

The modification of the third embodiment includes other modifications of the third embodiment, the first embodiment and its modification, the second embodiment and its modification, and the fourth. The same applies to the embodiment and its modification, the fifth embodiment and its modification, the sixth embodiment and its modification, and the seventh embodiment and its modification. .

The modification of the fourth embodiment includes other modifications of the fourth embodiment, the first embodiment and its modification, the second embodiment and its modification, and the third modification. The same applies to the embodiment and its modification, the fifth embodiment and its modification, the sixth embodiment and its modification, and the seventh embodiment and its modification. .

The modification of the fifth embodiment includes other modifications of the fifth embodiment, the first embodiment and its modification, the second embodiment and its modification, and the third modification. The same applies to the embodiment and its modification, the fourth embodiment and its modification, the sixth embodiment and its modification, and the seventh embodiment and its modification. .

The modification of the sixth embodiment includes other modifications of the sixth embodiment, the first embodiment and its modification, the second embodiment and its modification, and the third modification. The same applies to the embodiment and its modification, the fourth embodiment and its modification, the fifth embodiment and its modification, and the seventh embodiment and its modification. .

The modification of the seventh embodiment includes other modifications of the seventh embodiment, the first embodiment and its modification, the second embodiment and its modification, and the third modification. The same applies to the embodiment and its modification, the fourth embodiment and its modification, the fifth embodiment and its modification, and the sixth embodiment and its modification. .

In addition to the inventions described in the column “Means for Solving the Problems”, the following inventions may be employed. Hereinafter, explanations will be given while showing definitions of functions, effects and terms as necessary.

[Invention A1] The gaming machine of Invention A1 is
When a special prize determination for generating a special prize state is made triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and the special prize state is determined to be generated based on the result of the special prize determination. A game machine that displays the identification information in a stopped state and generates the special prize state,
Change display means for changing and displaying the identification information on the display means;
If the predetermined condition is established when the change display means is displaying the change, the condition establishment storage means for storing the establishment of the predetermined condition;
A first special prize determining means for performing the special prize determination when the change establishment means stores the establishment of the predetermined condition when the change display is completed;
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, a second special prize determining means for performing the special prize determination;
A special prize state generating means for generating the special prize state based on a determination result of the first special prize determination means;
Based on the determination result of the second special prize determining means, and a notice effect means for performing an effect of giving a notice about the gaming state that occurs when the change display subsequent to the current change display of the identification information is completed,
The process constituting part or all of the second special prize determining means and the notice effect producing means is executed as an interrupted process that is interrupted during execution of the predetermined period process executed at a predetermined period.

With such a configuration, a special prize is determined when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means by the change display means. If the predetermined condition is established when the change display means displays the change, the establishment of the predetermined condition is stored by the condition establishment storage means. After that, when the change display is completed by the change display means, since the establishment of the predetermined condition is stored in the condition establishment storage means, the special prize determination is performed by the first special prize determination means. Then, a special prize state is generated by the special prize state generation means based on the determination result of the first special prize determination means.

In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special prize determination is performed by the second special prize determination means.
Then, the notice effect means gives an effect of giving a notice about the gaming state that occurs when the change display subsequent to the current change display of the identification information is completed based on the determination result of the second special prize determination means.

In such a configuration, when the change display means ends the change display, the condition establishment storage means stores the establishment of the predetermined condition, and if the predetermined condition is established,
In addition to the special prize determination means, the second special prize determination means and the notice effect means operate, so that the processing load increases. Here, considering the case where all the processes constituting the second special prize determining means and the notice effect means are executed as a predetermined cycle process, the processing load of the predetermined cycle process increases and the predetermined cycle process does not end within the predetermined cycle. May cause a malfunction. In contrast,
In the present invention, the processing constituting part or all of the second special prize determination means and the notice effect means is executed as the interrupted process, so that the processing load of the predetermined periodic process can be reduced.

Thus, when the change display means finishes the change display, the condition establishment storage means stores the establishment of the predetermined condition, and even if the predetermined condition is established, the predetermined cycle processing is performed within the predetermined period. Since it can be expected to end, the possibility of occurrence of a problem can be reduced. Therefore, the effect that diversification of production can be realized as compared with the conventional case.

Here, as the establishment of the predetermined condition, in the case of a pachinko machine, for example, a gaming ball wins a winning prize opening, and in the case of a pachislot machine, for example, an operation lever for instructing a game start is operated. It is included.

The special prize state refers to a gaming state that gives a gaming value advantageous to a player. For a pachinko machine, for example, a non-probable big hit, a probable big hit, a JUB big hit, a sudden big hit, a latent big hit, a small win In the case of a pachislot machine, for example, a big bonus, a challenge time, and a small role are included. The same applies to the gaming machines of inventions A2 and A3.

The identification information refers to characters, figures, designs, images, codes, symbols, colors, other information that can be identified through vision, sound or other information that can be identified through five senses other than vision, or a combination thereof. The same applies to the gaming machines of inventions A2 and A3.

In addition, the identification information change display includes, for example, sequentially changing and displaying the identification information as in LED display, and displaying the identification information while fluctuating. Therefore, the change is not necessarily limited to fluctuation. The same applies to the gaming machines of inventions A2 and A3.

In addition, the timing at which the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content and the timing at which the special prize state is generated may be either first or simultaneously. If the timing at which the identification information is stopped and displayed is earlier, the expectation for the special prize state can be improved. On the other hand, if the timing for generating the special prize state is earlier, the unexpectedness can be improved. The same applies to the gaming machines of inventions A2 and A3.

The display means corresponds to the effect symbol display device 91 in the first embodiment, the change display means corresponds to steps S702 to S710, S714 to S718, and S720 to S724, and the notice effect means corresponds to step S806. -S810 and S856-S860, the predetermined cycle process corresponds to the timer interrupt process, the interrupted process corresponds to the main process, and the identification information corresponds to the effect symbol.

Further, establishment of the predetermined condition corresponds to winning in the start winning opening 84a or winning in the starting winning opening 84b in the first embodiment, and the condition establishment storing means includes steps S304 and S354.
The first special prize determination unit corresponds to steps S602, S604, S620, and S700, and the second special prize determination unit corresponds to steps S804 and S854.

[Invention A2] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A2 is
The special prize determination for generating the special prize state is triggered by winning the first prize opening or the second prize opening, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and the special prize state is generated based on the result of the special prize judgment If it is determined to be a gaming machine that stops displaying the identification information with a predetermined content and generates the special prize state,
Change display means for changing and displaying the identification information on the display means;
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number when there is a winning in the first winning opening;
A second random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number when there is a winning in the first winning opening;
If there is a winning in the first winning opening when the change display means is changed and displayed,
First prize storage means for storing the prize;
When the change display is completed by the change display means and the first prize storage means stores a prize, the random number value obtained at the time of the prize winning by the first random number obtaining means and a predetermined value are obtained. First special prize determination means for performing the special prize determination by comparing;
Second prize determination for performing the prize determination by comparing the predetermined value with the value of the random number acquired at the time of the winning by the second random number acquisition means when there is a winning in the first winning opening Means,
A third random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number when there is a winning in the second winning opening;
A fourth random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number when there is a winning in the second winning opening;
When there is a winning in the second winning opening when the change display means is displaying the change,
Second prize storage means for storing the prize;
When the second display storage means stores a prize when the change display is finished by the change display means, the random number value acquired at the time of the winning by the third random number acquisition means and a predetermined value are obtained. Third special prize determination means for performing the special prize determination by comparing;
When there is a prize winning in the second prize opening, a fourth special prize determination for performing the special prize determination by comparing the predetermined random value with the random number value acquired at the time of the winning by the fourth random number acquisition means Means,
A special prize state generating means for generating the special prize state based on a determination result of the first special prize determination means or the third special prize determination means;
Based on the determination result of the second special prize determination means or the fourth special prize determination means, a notice for performing an effect for giving a notice about the gaming state that occurs when the subsequent change display after the current change display of the identification information ends. Directing means,
The processes constituting part or all of the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, and the notice effect means are predetermined cycles that are executed in a predetermined cycle. It is characterized by being executed as an interrupted process that is interrupted during execution of the periodic process.

If it is such composition, special prize judgment will be performed triggered by winning to the 1st prize opening or the 2nd prize opening, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means by a change display means. If there is a change in the change display means and there is a winning in the first winning opening, the first random number acquisition means
A random number is acquired, and the first prize storage means stores the prize. After that, when the change display is completed by the change display means, the winning is stored in the first prize storage means, so that the random number value acquired at the time of winning by the first special prize determination means and a predetermined value The special award is determined by comparing. Similarly, when the change display means displays a change and there is a winning in the second winning opening, a random number is acquired by the third random number acquiring means, and the winning is stored by the second winning storage means. Is done. After that, when the change display is finished by the change display means,
Since the winning is stored in the winning storage means, the special prize determination is performed by the third special prize determining means by comparing the value of the random number acquired at the time of winning with a predetermined value. Then, the special prize state generation means generates a special prize state based on the determination result of the first special prize determination means or the third special prize determination means.

In addition, when there is a winning in the first winning opening, a random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, and a random number value acquired at the time of winning by the second special prize determination means and a predetermined value are obtained. The special prize is determined by the comparison. Similarly, when there is a winning in the second winning opening, a random number is acquired by the fourth random number acquiring means, and the random number value acquired at the winning by the fourth special prize determining means, and a predetermined value, The special award is determined by comparing. Then, the advance notice means gives a notice about the gaming state that occurs when the change display subsequent to the current change display of the identification information ends based on the determination result of the second special prize determination means or the fourth special prize determination means. Production is performed.

In such a configuration, when the change display unit finishes displaying the change and the first winning storage unit stores the winning combination, and if there is a winning in the first winning unit, the first random number is acquired. Apart from the means and the first special prize determination means, the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, and the notice effect means operate, so that the processing load increases. In particular, in the second special prize determination means,
Since the value of the random number is compared with the predetermined value, when the number of comparisons is large, the processing load increases accordingly. Similarly, when the change display is completed by the change display means and the second winning storage means stores a winning combination, and there is a winning in the second winning opening, the third random number obtaining means and the second random number obtaining means Apart from the 3 special prize determining means, the fourth random number obtaining means, the fourth special prize determining means, and the notice effect producing means operate, so that the processing load increases. Furthermore, if they overlap, the processing load further increases. Here, in consideration of a case where all the processes constituting the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means and the notice effect means are executed as the predetermined period processing, the predetermined period There is a possibility that the processing load of the process increases and a problem that the predetermined cycle process does not end within the predetermined cycle.

When the change display means finishes the change display, if the first prize storage means or the second prize storage means stores a prize, the special prize determination by the first special prize determination means or the third special prize determination means,
In the gaming machine that performs the special prize determination by the second special prize judging means or the fourth special prize judging means when there is a prize in the first prize opening or the second prize opening, the change display means ends the change display. In the case where the first prize storage means or the second prize storage means stores a prize, and there is a prize in the first prize slot and a prize in the second prize slot, the processing is performed as described above. There is a possibility that the load increases and the predetermined cycle processing does not end within the predetermined cycle.

If the predetermined cycle processing does not end within the predetermined cycle, the random number used in the first special prize determination unit or the third special prize determination unit is updated in the predetermined cycle process.
The update time of the random number used by the special prize determination unit or the third special prize determination unit is longer than when it ends within a predetermined period. If this phenomenon occurs when the random number used by the first special prize determination unit or the third special prize determination unit is a predetermined value, the numerical value range of the random numbers used by the first special prize determination unit or the third special prize determination unit is all updated. Since the time during which the random number used in the first special prize determination unit or the third special prize determination unit is a predetermined value becomes longer with respect to the time, the winning probability in the special prize state increases from the default. Conversely, if this phenomenon occurs when the random number used in the first special prize determination unit or the third special prize determination unit is other than a predetermined value, the numerical range of the random number used in the first special prize determination unit or the third special prize determination unit is 1st special prize judging means or 3rd for the time when all are updated
Since the time during which the random number used in the special prize determination means is a predetermined value is relatively short, the winning probability in the special prize state is reduced from a predetermined value. Therefore, there is a problem that the winning probability in the special prize state is not as predetermined, which affects the gameability.

In addition, when the predetermined cycle processing does not end within the predetermined cycle, since the start of the special prize determination by the first special prize determination unit or the third special prize determination unit is delayed, a waiting time occurs from the stop display of the identification information to the start of the change, During this time, the holding ball is not digested, so that there is a problem that useless balls are generated or that the player is bothered to stop. Further, if such a phenomenon occurs frequently, there is a problem that the operating rate of the gaming machine is lowered.

In order to solve these problems, for example, in the probability variation state where the random numbers used in the first special prize determination means or the third special prize determination means are compared with a plurality of predetermined values, the second special prize determination means or the fourth special prize determination means It is conceivable to employ a configuration in which no special prize determination is performed.

However, in this configuration, there is a problem in that diversification of the production cannot be realized because the pre-reading effect that further enhances the game cannot be synergistically performed in a probable state where the game is exciting.

On the other hand, in the present invention, the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, the fourth random number acquisition means,
Since processing that constitutes part or all of the fourth special prize determining means and the notice effect means is executed as the interrupted process, the processing load of the predetermined periodic process can be reduced.

As a result, when the change display is completed by the change display means, the winning is stored in the first winning storage means or the second winning storage means, and the winning to the first winning opening and the second winning opening are also made. Even if there is a win, it can be expected that the predetermined cycle process will be completed within the predetermined cycle, so that the winning probability in the special prize state becomes the default and it is possible to prevent the gameability from being affected. Also, no wasted balls are generated or the player is not bothered to stop. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the operating rate of the gaming machine from decreasing. On top of that,
In a promising state in which the game is exciting, it is possible to synergistically perform a pre-reading effect that further excites the game with respect to winning in the first winning opening and winning in the second winning opening. Therefore, the effect that diversification of production can be realized as compared with the conventional case.

Here, since both the first random number acquisition unit and the second random number acquisition unit acquire random numbers when a winning is made to the first winning opening, when configured as processing, they are configured as separate processing. It can also be configured as the same processing. Hereinafter, in the gaming machine of invention A3, it is the same.

In addition, since both the third random number acquisition unit and the fourth random number acquisition unit acquire random numbers when a winning is made to the second winning opening, when configured as processing, they should be configured as separate processing. It can also be configured as the same processing. Hereinafter, in the gaming machine of invention A3, it is the same.

In addition, the first special prize determination unit performs the special prize determination when the change display unit ends the change display, and the first prize storage unit stores the prize, but the change display unit ends the change display. In this case, the special prize determination is performed on the condition that the prize is stored in the first prize storage means. Therefore, when the change display is completed by the change display means, the special prize determination may be performed only when the first prize storage means stores the winning prize, or when the change display is finished by the change display means. When other conditions are satisfied in addition to the case where the winning is memorized by the one winning memory means (for example, when no winning is memorized by the second prize memory means), the special prize determination may be performed.

In addition, the third special prize determination unit performs the special prize determination when the change display is completed by the change display unit and the second prize storage unit stores the prize, but the change display unit ends the change display. In this case, the special prize determination is performed on the condition that the second prize storage means stores the prize. Therefore, when the change display is completed by the change display means, the special prize determination may be performed only when the second prize storage means stores the prize, or when the change display is finished by the change display means. In addition to the case where a prize is stored in the two prize storage means, when other conditions are satisfied (for example, when no prize is stored in the first prize storage means), a special prize determination may be performed.

The display means corresponds to the effect symbol display device 91 in the first embodiment, the change display means corresponds to steps S702 to S710, S714 to S718, and S720 to S724, and the notice effect means corresponds to step S806. -S810 and S856-S860, the predetermined cycle process corresponds to the timer interrupt process, the interrupted process corresponds to the main process, and the identification information corresponds to the effect symbol.

The first winning opening corresponds to the starting winning opening 84a in the first embodiment, the second winning opening corresponds to the starting winning opening 84b, and the first winning storage means corresponds to step S304, The second winning storage means corresponds to step S354, and the first random number acquisition means is step S306.
The second random number acquisition unit corresponds to step S312, the third random number acquisition unit corresponds to step S356, and the fourth random number acquisition unit corresponds to step S362.

In addition, the first special prize determination unit includes steps S602, S604 in the first embodiment.
Corresponding to S700, the second special prize determination means corresponds to step S804, the third special prize determination means corresponds to steps S602, S620, and S700, and the fourth special prize determination means corresponds to step S804.
854.

[Invention A3] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A3 is:
The special prize determination for generating the special prize state is triggered by winning the first prize opening or the second prize opening, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and the special prize state is generated based on the result of the special prize judgment If it is determined to be a gaming machine that stops displaying the identification information with a predetermined content and generates the special prize state,
Change display means for changing and displaying the identification information on the display means;
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number when there is a winning in the first winning opening;
A second random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number when there is a winning in the first winning opening;
If there is a winning in the first winning opening when the change display means is changed and displayed,
First prize storage means for storing the prize;
When there is a winning in the second winning opening when the change display means is displaying the change,
Second prize storage means for storing the prize;
When the change display is completed by the change display means, if the first prize storage means stores a winning and the second prize storage means does not store a winning, the first random number acquisition means at the time of the winning First special prize determination means for performing the special prize determination by comparing the acquired random value and a predetermined value;
Second prize determination for performing the prize determination by comparing the predetermined value with the value of the random number acquired at the time of the winning by the second random number acquisition means when there is a winning in the first winning opening Means,
A third random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number when there is a winning in the second winning opening;
A fourth random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number when there is a winning in the second winning opening;
When the second display storage means stores a prize when the change display is finished by the change display means, the random number value acquired at the time of the winning by the third random number acquisition means and a predetermined value are obtained. Third special prize determination means for performing the special prize determination by comparing;
When there is a prize winning in the second prize opening, a fourth special prize determination for performing the special prize determination by comparing the predetermined random value with the random number value acquired at the time of the winning by the fourth random number acquisition means Means,
A special prize state generating means for generating the special prize state based on a determination result of the first special prize determination means or the third special prize determination means;
Based on the determination result of the second special prize determination means or the fourth special prize determination means, a notice for performing an effect for giving a notice about the gaming state that occurs when the subsequent change display after the current change display of the identification information ends. Directing means,
The processes constituting part or all of the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, and the notice effect means are predetermined cycles that are executed in a predetermined cycle. It is characterized by being executed as an interrupted process that is interrupted during execution of the periodic process.

If it is such composition, special prize judgment will be performed triggered by winning to the 1st prize opening or the 2nd prize opening, and identification information will be changed and displayed on a display means by a change display means. If there is a change in the change display means and there is a winning in the first winning opening, the first random number acquisition means
A random number is acquired, and the first prize storage means stores the prize. After that, when the change display is completed by the change display means, the winning is stored in the first winning storage means, so when no winning is stored in the second winning storage means, by the first special prize determining means, A special prize is determined by comparing a random value acquired at the time of winning with a predetermined value. Similarly,
If the change display means displays a change and there is a winning at the second winning opening, a random number is acquired by the third random number acquiring means, and the winning is stored by the second winning storage means. After that, when the change display is completed by the change display means, since the winning is stored in the second winning storage means, the random number value acquired at the time of winning by the third special prize determining means, the predetermined value, The special award is determined by comparing. That is, when the first prize storage means and the second prize storage means both store a prize, the special prize determination by the first special prize determination means is not performed, and the special prize determination by the third special prize determination means is performed. The special prize determination by the third special prize determination means is performed with priority over the special prize determination by the first special prize determination means. Then, the special prize state generation means generates a special prize state based on the determination result of the first special prize determination means or the third special prize determination means.

In addition, when there is a winning in the first winning opening, a random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, and a random number value acquired at the time of winning by the second special prize determination means and a predetermined value are obtained. The special prize is determined by the comparison. Similarly, when there is a winning in the second winning opening, a random number is acquired by the fourth random number acquiring means, and the random number value acquired at the winning by the fourth special prize determining means, and a predetermined value, The special award is determined by comparing. Then, the advance notice means gives a notice about the gaming state that occurs when the change display subsequent to the current change display of the identification information ends based on the determination result of the second special prize determination means or the fourth special prize determination means. Production is performed.

In such a configuration, when the change display unit finishes displaying the change and the first winning storage unit stores the winning combination, and if there is a winning in the first winning unit, the first random number is acquired. Apart from the means and the first special prize determination means, the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, and the notice effect means operate, so that the processing load increases. In particular, in the second special prize determination means,
Since the value of the random number is compared with the predetermined value, when the number of comparisons is large, the processing load increases accordingly. Similarly, when the change display is completed by the change display means and the second winning storage means stores a winning combination, and there is a winning in the second winning opening, the third random number obtaining means and the second random number obtaining means Apart from the 3 special prize determining means, the fourth random number obtaining means, the fourth special prize determining means, and the notice effect producing means operate, so that the processing load increases. Furthermore, if they overlap, the processing load further increases. Here, in consideration of a case where all the processes constituting the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means and the notice effect means are executed as the predetermined period processing, the predetermined period There is a possibility that the processing load of the process increases and a problem that the predetermined cycle process does not end within the predetermined cycle.

When the change display means finishes the change display, if the first prize storage means or the second prize storage means stores a prize, the special prize determination by the first special prize determination means or the third special prize determination means,
In the gaming machine that performs the special prize determination by the second special prize judging means or the fourth special prize judging means when there is a prize in the first prize opening or the second prize opening, the change display means ends the change display. In the case where the first prize storage means or the second prize storage means stores a prize, and there is a prize in the first prize slot and a prize in the second prize slot, the processing is performed as described above. There is a possibility that the load increases and the predetermined cycle processing does not end within the predetermined cycle.

If the predetermined cycle processing does not end within the predetermined cycle, the random number used in the first special prize determination unit or the third special prize determination unit is updated in the predetermined cycle process.
The update time of the random number used by the special prize determination unit or the third special prize determination unit is longer than when it ends within a predetermined period. If this phenomenon occurs when the random number used by the first special prize determination unit or the third special prize determination unit is a predetermined value, the numerical value range of the random numbers used by the first special prize determination unit or the third special prize determination unit is all updated. Since the time during which the random number used in the first special prize determination unit or the third special prize determination unit is a predetermined value becomes longer with respect to the time, the winning probability in the special prize state increases from the default. Conversely, if this phenomenon occurs when the random number used in the first special prize determination unit or the third special prize determination unit is other than a predetermined value, the numerical range of the random number used in the first special prize determination unit or the third special prize determination unit is 1st special prize judging means or 3rd for the time when all are updated
Since the time during which the random number used in the special prize determination means is a predetermined value is relatively short, the winning probability in the special prize state is reduced from a predetermined value. Therefore, there is a problem that the winning probability in the special prize state is not as predetermined, which affects the gameability.

In addition, when the predetermined cycle processing does not end within the predetermined cycle, since the start of the special prize determination by the first special prize determination unit or the third special prize determination unit is delayed, a waiting time occurs from the stop display of the identification information to the start of the change, During this time, the holding ball is not digested, so that there is a problem that useless balls are generated or that the player is bothered to stop. Further, if such a phenomenon occurs frequently, there is a problem that the operating rate of the gaming machine is lowered.

In order to solve these problems, for example, in the probability variation state where the random numbers used in the first special prize determination means or the third special prize determination means are compared with a plurality of predetermined values, the second special prize determination means or the fourth special prize determination means It is conceivable to employ a configuration in which no special prize determination is performed.

However, in this configuration, there is a problem in that diversification of the production cannot be realized because the pre-reading effect that further enhances the game cannot be synergistically performed in a probable state where the game is exciting.

On the other hand, in the present invention, the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, the fourth random number acquisition means,
Since processing that constitutes part or all of the fourth special prize determining means and the notice effect means is executed as the interrupted process, the processing load of the predetermined periodic process can be reduced.

As a result, when the change display is completed by the change display means, the winning is stored in the first winning storage means or the second winning storage means, and the winning to the first winning opening and the second winning opening are also made. Even if there is a win, it can be expected that the predetermined cycle process will be completed within the predetermined cycle, so that the winning probability in the special prize state becomes the default and it is possible to prevent the gameability from being affected. Also, no wasted balls are generated or the player is not bothered to stop. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the operating rate of the gaming machine from decreasing. On top of that,
In a promising state in which the game is exciting, it is possible to synergistically perform a pre-reading effect that further excites the game with respect to winning in the first winning opening and winning in the second winning opening. Therefore, the effect that diversification of production can be realized as compared with the conventional case.

Here, the display means corresponds to the effect symbol display device 91 in the first embodiment, the change display means corresponds to steps S702 to S710, S714 to S718, and S720 to S724, and the notice effect means means the step. Corresponding to S806-S810, S856-S860,
The predetermined cycle process corresponds to the timer interrupt process, the interrupted process corresponds to the main process, and the identification information corresponds to the effect symbol.

The first winning opening corresponds to the starting winning opening 84a in the first embodiment, the second winning opening corresponds to the starting winning opening 84b, and the first winning storage means corresponds to step S304, The second winning storage means corresponds to step S354, and the first random number acquisition means is step S306.
The second random number acquisition unit corresponds to step S312, the third random number acquisition unit corresponds to step S356, and the fourth random number acquisition unit corresponds to step S362.

In addition, the first special prize determination unit includes steps S602, S604 in the first embodiment.
Corresponding to S700, the second special prize determination means corresponds to step S804, the third special prize determination means corresponds to steps S602, S620, and S700, and the fourth special prize determination means corresponds to step S804.
854.

[Invention A4] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A4 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A2 and A3.
The process constituting part of the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, and the notice effect means is executed as the predetermined cycle process,
The process constituting the remaining part of the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, and the notice effect means is executed as the interrupted process. And

If it is such composition, the 2nd random number acquisition means, the 2nd special prize judgment means, the 4th random number acquisition means,
A process constituting a part of the fourth special prize determining means and the notice effect means is executed as a predetermined periodic process, and the second random number obtaining means, the second special prize judging means, the fourth random number obtaining means, the fourth special prize judging means, and the notice effect. Since the process constituting the remaining part of the means is executed as the interrupted process, the processing load of the predetermined periodic process can be reduced.

As a result, when the change display is completed by the change display means, the winning is stored in the first winning storage means or the second winning storage means, and the winning to the first winning opening and the second winning opening are also made. Even if there is a win, it can be expected that the predetermined cycle process will be completed within the predetermined cycle, so that the possibility of occurrence of a problem can be reduced.

[Invention A5] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A5 is the gaming machine of Invention A4,
The processes constituting the second random number acquisition unit and the fourth random number acquisition unit are executed as the predetermined cycle process,
The processes constituting the second special prize determining means, the fourth special prize determining means, and the notice effect producing means are executed as the interrupted process.

If it is such composition, the processing which constitutes the 2nd random number acquisition means and the 4th random number acquisition means is performed as predetermined cycle processing, and the processing which constitutes the 2nd special prize judging means, the 4th special prize judging means, and the notice effect means Is executed as a suspended process. When the change display is completed by the change display means, the winning is stored in the first winning storage means or the second winning storage means, and the first
When there is a prize at the prize opening and a prize at the second prize slot, the processing load is particularly large among the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, and the notice effect means. The larger is the processing that constitutes the second special prize determination means and the fourth special prize determination means. Therefore, if a process with a large processing load is executed as an interrupted process, the processing load of the predetermined cycle process can be reduced.

As a result, when the change display is completed by the change display means, the winning is stored in the first winning storage means or the second winning storage means, and the winning to the first winning opening and the second winning opening are also made. Even if there is a win, it can be further expected that the predetermined cycle process will be completed within the predetermined cycle, so that the possibility of occurrence of a problem can be further reduced.

In order to solve the above problem, for example, second random number acquisition means, second special prize determination means, fourth
It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which all of the random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, and the notice effect means are executed as interrupted processing.

However, in this configuration, when the random number used for the special prize determination by the first special prize determination unit or the third special prize determination unit is acquired by the predetermined cycle process, the special prize determination by the second special prize determination unit or the fourth special prize determination unit is performed. Since the random number to be used is acquired by the interrupted process, there is a problem that the values of both random numbers may be different depending on the timing. If both random numbers are different,
For example, there is a possibility that a problem that the special prize state does not occur may occur even though an effect of notifying that the special prize state occurs is performed.

On the other hand, in this invention, the process which comprises a 2nd random number acquisition means and a 4th random number acquisition means is performed as a predetermined period process.

Accordingly, the random number used for the special prize determination by the first special prize determination unit and the random number used for the special prize determination by the second special prize determination unit may be different from each other, and the random number used for the special prize determination by the third special prize determination unit The effect that the possibility that the random number used for the special prize determination by the fourth special prize determination means becomes a different value can be reduced.

[Invention A6] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A6 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A2 to A5,
During execution of the processing constituting the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, or the notice effect production means, the next to the first prize opening is performed. It is further characterized by further comprising multi-processing execution prohibiting means for prohibiting execution of the processing for winning or winning next to the second winning opening.

If it is such composition, the 2nd random number acquisition means, the 2nd special prize judgment means, the 4th random number acquisition means,
While executing the process constituting the fourth special prize determining means or the notice effect means, even if there is a next prize to the first prize opening or a next prize to the second prize opening by the multiple process execution prohibiting means, Execution of the winning process is prohibited.

As a result, even if there is a continuous winning in the first winning opening or winning in the second winning opening, the second random number obtaining means, the second special prize determining means, the fourth random number obtaining means, Since the processing that constitutes the special prize determination means or the notice effect means is not executed multiple times, the memory efficiency can be improved, for example, the memory in the stack is reduced.

Here, the multiple processing execution prohibition means is the steps S308 and S3 in the first embodiment.
58, S800, and S850.

[Invention A7] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A7 is the gaming machine of Invention A6,
Execution identification information storage means for storing execution identification information at the start of execution of the process;
Execution identification information erasing means for erasing the storage of the execution identification information at the end of execution of the process,
The multiple processing execution prohibiting unit prohibits execution of the processing when the execution identification information is stored.

If it is such composition, the 2nd random number acquisition means, the 2nd special prize judgment means, the 4th random number acquisition means,
When the process constituting the fourth special prize determining means or the notice effect means is started, the execution identification information is stored by the execution identification information storage means. When the process ends, the execution identification information erasure unit erases the storage of the execution identification information. Therefore, during that process,
Even if there is a prize at the first prize opening or a prize at the second prize opening, since the execution identification information is stored, execution of the process for the prize is prohibited by the multiple processing execution prohibiting means.

As a result, execution of the process for the next winning to the first winning opening or the next winning to the second winning opening is prohibited only by storing and deleting the execution identification information at the start and end of execution of the process. Therefore, the effect that the processing load can be reduced is obtained.

Here, the execution identification information storage means includes steps S310 and S3 in the first embodiment.
60, the execution identification information erasing unit corresponds to steps S814 and S864.

[Invention A8] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A8 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A4 to A7,
The process of configuring the first random number acquisition unit and the process of configuring the second random number acquisition unit are:
It is executed as one of the predetermined cycle process and the interrupted process.

For a prize to the first prize opening, since it is necessary to match the result of the special prize state generating means and the result of the notice producing means, the random number used by the first special prize judging means and the random number used by the second special prize judging means Must have the same value. This is because, if the values of the two random numbers are different, for example, there is a possibility that a problem that the special prize state does not occur may occur although an effect of notifying that the special prize state will occur is performed. However, for example, if the processing that constitutes the first random number acquisition means is executed as a predetermined periodic process and the processing that constitutes the second random number acquisition means is executed separately as an interrupted process, the values of both random numbers may differ depending on the timing. There is.

If it is such composition, processing which constitutes the 1st random number acquisition means and processing which constitutes the 2nd random number acquisition means are performed as one of predetermined cycle processing and interrupted processing.

Thereby, the effect that the possibility that the random number used in the first special prize determination unit and the random number used in the second special prize determination unit are different from each other for the first prize at the first prize opening can be reduced. .

[Invention A9] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A9 is the gaming machine of Invention A8,
Further comprising first winning determination means for determining winning in the first winning opening,
The processing that constitutes the first winning determination means, the processing that constitutes the first random number acquisition means, and the processing that constitutes the second random number acquisition means are executed as the predetermined period processing.

If it is such composition, processing which constitutes the 1st prize judging means, processing which constitutes the 1st random number acquisition means, and processing which constitutes the 2nd random number acquisition means are performed as predetermined cycle processing.

Thereby, even if the processing load of interrupted processing and other processing increases depending on the content of the game, it is possible to obtain an effect that the winning to the first winning opening can be determined at a regular timing.
Moreover, the effect that the random number used by the 1st special prize determination means and the random number used by the 2nd special prize determination means at the winning timing to the 1st prize opening can be acquired.

Here, the first winning determination means corresponds to step S300 in the first embodiment.

[Invention A10] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A10 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A4 to A9.
The process of configuring the third random number acquisition unit and the process of configuring the fourth random number acquisition unit are:
It is executed as one of the predetermined cycle process and the interrupted process.

As for a prize at the second prize opening, since it is necessary to match the result of the special prize state generating means and the result of the notice producing means, the random number used by the third special prize determining means and the random number used by the fourth special prize judging means Must have the same value. This is because, if the values of the two random numbers are different, for example, there is a possibility that a problem that the special prize state does not occur may occur although an effect of notifying that the special prize state will occur is performed. However, for example, if the process constituting the third random number acquisition unit is executed as a predetermined cycle process and the process constituting the fourth random number acquisition unit is separately executed as an interrupted process, the values of both random numbers may differ depending on the timing. There is.

If it is such composition, processing which constitutes the 3rd random number acquisition means and processing which constitutes the 4th random number acquisition means are performed as one of predetermined cycle processing and interrupted processing.

As a result, there is an effect of reducing the possibility that the random number used in the third special prize determination unit and the random number used in the fourth special prize determination unit are different from each other for a certain prize at the second prize opening. .

[Invention A11] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A11 is the gaming machine of Invention A10,
A second winning determination means for determining a winning in the second winning opening;
The processing constituting the second winning determination means, the processing constituting the third random number acquisition means, and the processing constituting the fourth random number acquisition means are executed as the predetermined period processing.

If it is such composition, processing which constitutes the 2nd prize judging means, processing which constitutes the 3rd random number acquisition means, and processing which constitutes the 4th random number acquisition means are performed as predetermined cycle processing.

Thereby, even if the processing load of the interrupted process and other processes increases depending on the content of the game, it is possible to obtain an effect that the winning to the second winning opening can be determined at a regular timing.
In addition, it is possible to obtain an effect that the random number used by the third special prize determination unit and the random number used by the fourth special prize determination unit can be acquired at the winning timing at the second prize opening.

Here, the second winning determination means corresponds to step S350 in the first embodiment.

[Invention A12] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A12 is any one of Inventions A2 to A11.
In this game machine,
Further comprising main control means for performing main control of the game, and display control means for performing display control of the display means by control of the main control means,
The main control means includes
Comprising the notice effect means,
If the result of the comparison by the second special prize determination means has a predetermined relationship between the value of the random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means and the predetermined value, the notification effect means is configured to store the first prize storage. Sending a command including the memorized information of the means to the display control means,
The display control means includes
Command receiving means for receiving the command;
Based on the command received by the command receiving means, the display means performs the first
It is provided with a notice display means for performing a notice display at a display position corresponding to the memorized information of the prize in the prize storage means.

If it is such a structure, in the main control means, the value of the random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means and the predetermined value have a predetermined relationship as a result of the comparison by the second special prize determination means by the notice effect means. In this case, a command including winning information stored in the first winning storage means is transmitted to the display control means.

In the display control means, when the command is received by the command receiving means, the notice display means performs a notice display at a display position corresponding to the winning storage information in the first prize storage means based on the received command.

Thereby, in the display means, the display position corresponding to the winning storage information of the first winning storage means is provided as an effect of notifying the gaming state that occurs when the subsequent change display of the current change display of the identification information is completed. An advance notice can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the player can grasp which winning prize to the first winning opening becomes the special prize state only by looking at the notice display on the display means.

Here, as the predetermined relationship, for example, (1) when the value of the random number matches the predetermined value,
2) When the secondary information obtained from the random number value matches the predetermined value, (3) the random number value;
When secondary information obtained from a predetermined value matches, (4) When secondary information obtained from a random number value matches secondary information obtained from a predetermined value, and (5) The above combination Includes a case where the information has a predetermined magnitude relationship, a relationship belonging to a predetermined numerical range, a predetermined logical relationship, and a predetermined correspondence relationship. The same applies to the gaming machines of inventions A19, A32 and A33.

The main control means transmits a command, for example, when (1) the main control means transmits directly to the display control means (direct transmission), and (2) the main control means sends the command to other means once. And when the other means sends to the display control means (relay transmission), and (3) the main control means broadcasts the command in an environment where the main control means and the display control means are communicably connected. Case (broadcast transmission). As the transmission procedure, for example, (1) when the main control means transmits regardless of the request from the display control means or other means (active transmission), and (2) according to the request from the display control means or other means. In this case, the main control means may transmit (passive transmission). Hereinafter, Inventions A19, A32 and A3
The same applies to the three gaming machines.

Also, the case where the display control means receives the command is, for example, (1) when the display control means receives directly from the main control means (direct reception), or (2) the main control means once sends the command to other means. And when the display control means receives from other means (relay reception), and (
3) In an environment where the main control unit and the display control unit are communicably connected, the case where the main control unit broadcasts a command and the display control unit receives the command (broadcast reception) is included. The reception procedure includes, for example, (1) when the display control means receives regardless of requests from the main control means and other means (active reception), and (2) in response to requests from the main control means and other means. In this case, the display control means may receive (passive reception).
The same applies to the gaming machines of inventions A19, A32 and A33.

The main control means controls the display control means. For example, (1) the main control means directly controls the display control means (direct control), and (2) the main control means controls other means. However, the case where the other means controls the display control means (indirect control) is included. Hereinafter, Invention A1
9, the same applies to the gaming machines A32 and A33.

The main control means corresponds to the main control apparatus 162 in the first embodiment, the display control means corresponds to the display control apparatus 302, the command receiving means corresponds to step S1300, and the notice display means is , Corresponding to steps S1602 to S1606, S2104.

[Invention A13] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A13 is the gaming machine of Invention A12,
Hold storage information storage means for storing the storage information of the winning of the first winning storage means in the storage means as hold storage information;
Further comprising a hold storage information reading means for reading the hold storage information from the storage means;
The process constituting the first winning storage means and the process constituting the hold storage information storage means are executed as one of the predetermined cycle process and the interrupted process, and the process constituting the hold storage information reading means and the process The process constituting the notice effect means is executed as the other of the predetermined cycle process and the interrupted process,
The notice effect means transmits a command including the hold storage information read by the hold storage information reading means.

When one of the process constituting the first prize storage means and the process constituting the notice effect means is executed separately as the predetermined period process and the other as the interrupted process, the process is performed between the predetermined period process and the interrupted process. Since it is necessary to transfer the winning storage information of the first winning storage means, the winning storage information of the first winning storage means is temporarily stored in the storage means. At this time, with respect to the storage information of the winning of the first winning storage means, it is necessary to perform a notice display at the display position corresponding to the stored information, so that the storing information of the winning of the first winning storage means and the storage of the storage means The stored information must be the same value. This is because when the two pieces of stored information are different, for example, there is a possibility that a notice will be displayed at a position where the notice should not be displayed. However, for example, if the processing constituting the first winning storage means is executed as a predetermined cycle processing and the processing constituting the hold storage information storage means is executed separately as interrupted processing, both pieces of stored information may be different depending on the timing. is there.

If it is such composition, processing which constitutes the 1st prize storage part and processing which constitutes reservation storage information storage part are performed as one of predetermined cycle processing and interruption processing.

Thereby, the effect that the possibility that the storage information of the winning of the first winning storage means and the stored storage information of the storage means are different can be reduced.

Here, the hold storage information storage means corresponds to step S314 in the first embodiment, and the hold storage information reading means corresponds to step S802.

[Invention A14] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A14 is the gaming machine of Invention A13,
Further comprising first winning determination means for determining winning in the first winning opening,
The processing constituting the first winning determination means, the processing constituting the first winning storage means, and the processing constituting the reserved storage information storage means are executed as the predetermined cycle processing.

If it is such composition, processing which constitutes the 1st prize judging means, processing which constitutes the 1st prize storage means, and processing which constitutes reservation storage information storage means are performed as predetermined cycle processing.

Thereby, even if the processing load of interrupted processing and other processing increases depending on the content of the game, it is possible to obtain an effect that the winning to the first winning opening can be determined at a regular timing.
Further, it is possible to obtain an effect that the winning can be stored at the timing of winning the first winning opening and the stored storage information can be stored in the storage means.

Here, the first winning determination means corresponds to step S300 in the first embodiment.

[Invention A15] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A15 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A13 and A14.
Between the process that constitutes the hold memory information storage means and the process that constitutes the hold memory information read means, the hold memory information in the memory means matches the prize storage information in the first prize storage means. The storage unit further includes a storage unit for updating storage information that updates storage information stored in the storage unit.

With such a configuration, a process in which the winning storage information of the first winning storage unit is changed between the process of configuring the holding storage information storage unit and the process of configuring the holding storage information reading unit is executed. Also, the hold storage information update means updates the hold storage information in the storage means so that the hold storage information in the storage means matches the winning storage information in the first winning storage means.

Thereby, the effect that the possibility that the storage information of the winning of the first winning storage means and the stored storage information of the storage means may be further reduced can be obtained.

Here, the pending storage information updating unit is configured to perform steps S624 and S6 in the first embodiment.
26.

[Invention A16] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A16 is the gaming machine of Invention A15,
When the change display is completed by the change display means, and the first prize storage means stores a prize, the first prize storage information updating means for updating the prize storage information in the first prize storage means. In addition,
When the first storage information update unit updates the storage information of the first prize storage unit with the first prize storage information update unit, the storage information stored in the storage unit has a degree corresponding to the degree of the update. It is characterized by updating.

In such a configuration, when the change display means finishes the change display, and the first prize storage means stores the prize, the first prize storage information update means causes the first prize storage means to win. Even if the stored information is updated, the pending storage information updating means updates the pending storage information in the storage means to a degree corresponding to the degree of the update.

Thereby, the effect that the possibility that the storage information of the winning of the first winning storage means and the stored storage information of the storage means may be further reduced can be obtained.

Here, the hold storage information update means may update the hold storage information in the storage means before the update by the first prize storage information update means, or after the update by the first prize storage information update means. The on-hold storage information may be updated.

Further, the first winning memory information update means corresponds to step S622 in the first embodiment.

[Invention A17] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A17 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A13 to A16,
First random number storage means for storing the random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means in a first area of the storage means;
A second random number storage means for storing the random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means in a second area different from the first area of the storage means;
The first special prize determination unit performs the special prize determination by comparing the random value stored in the first area of the storage unit with the predetermined value;
The second special prize determination unit performs the special prize determination by comparing a random number value stored in the second area of the storage unit with the predetermined value.

When the winning storage information of the first winning storage means and the hold storage information of the storage means differ depending on the timing, the random numbers acquired by the first random number acquisition means or the second random number acquisition means are stored in the same area. In this case, the random number value used in the first special prize determination unit is different from the random number value acquired in the first random number acquisition unit, or the random number value used in the second special prize determination unit is acquired in the second random number acquisition unit. It may be different from the random value.

With such a configuration, the random number acquired by the first random number acquisition unit is stored in the first area of the storage unit by the first random number storage unit, and the first special prize determination unit stores the random number acquired in the first area of the storage unit. The special prize is determined by comparing the stored random number value with a predetermined value. The random number acquired by the second random number acquisition unit is stored in the second area of the storage unit by the second random number storage unit, and the random number value stored in the second area of the storage unit by the second special prize determination unit. And the predetermined value is compared with a predetermined value. Therefore, the random number acquired by the first random number acquisition unit and the random number acquired by the second random number acquisition unit are stored in different areas of the storage unit.

Thereby, the random number value used in the first special prize determination unit is different from the random number value acquired in the first random number acquisition unit, or the random number value used in the second special prize determination unit is acquired in the second random number acquisition unit. The effect that the possibility of being different from the value of the random number can be reduced is obtained.

Here, the first random number storage means corresponds to step S306 in the first embodiment,
The second random number storage means corresponds to step S312.

[Invention A18] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A18 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A12 to A17,
While executing the processing constituting the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, or the notice effect means, the multiple processing execution prohibition prohibiting the execution of the processing for the next winning to the first winning opening. Means,
First winning detection means for detecting winning in the first winning opening;
A first detection result acquisition means for acquiring a detection result of the first winning detection means for each execution of the predetermined cycle process;
A first winning determination means for executing the predetermined cycle processing a plurality of times and determining a winning to the first winning opening based on a detection result acquired by the first detection result acquisition means;
The process which comprises the said 1st winning determination means is performed as the said predetermined period process, It is characterized by the above-mentioned.

When a predetermined cycle process is executed when a winning is made to the first winning opening, the first winning determining means determines the winning to the first winning opening, so the second random number obtaining means and the second special prize Execution of the processing that constitutes the judging means or the notice effect means is started, but at that point,
If the process constituting the second random number acquisition unit, the second special prize determination unit, or the notice effect unit is being executed, the multiple process execution prohibition unit prohibits the execution of the process. Then, since the command is not transmitted to the display control unit for the next winning to the first winning opening, there is a possibility that the storage information of the winning of the first winning storage unit is not displayed on the display unit.

With such a configuration, when there is a winning at the first winning opening, the winning at the first winning opening is detected by the first winning detecting means. This detection result is obtained by the first detection result acquisition means.
It is acquired every time the predetermined periodic process is executed. Then, the first winning determination means determines the winning to the first winning opening based on the detection result obtained by executing the predetermined cycle process a plurality of times. That is, in order for the first winning determination means to determine the winning to the first winning opening, it is necessary to execute the predetermined cycle process a plurality of times.

Accordingly, since it is unlikely that the predetermined periodic process is executed a plurality of times during the processing that constitutes the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, or the notice effect means, the next prize winning to the first prize opening The execution of the processing constituting the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, or the notice effect means is not prohibited, and the possibility that the stored information of the winning prize storage means is not displayed is reduced. The effect that it can do is acquired.

Here, the multiple processing execution prohibiting means is the steps S308 and S8 in the first embodiment.
The first winning detection means corresponds to the start winning opening sensor 154a, the first detection result acquisition means corresponds to step S200, and the first winning determination means corresponds to step S300.

[Invention A19] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A19 is any one of Inventions A2 to A11.
In this game machine,
Further comprising main control means for performing main control of the game, and display control means for performing display control of the display means by control of the main control means,
The main control means includes
Comprising the notice effect means,
When the result of the comparison by the fourth special prize determining means has a predetermined relationship between the value of the random number acquired by the fourth random number acquiring means and the predetermined value, the notice effect producing means Sending a command including the memorized information of the means to the display control means,
The display control means includes
Command receiving means for receiving the command;
Based on the command received by the command receiving means, the display means performs the second
It is provided with a notice display means for performing a notice display at a display position corresponding to the memorized information of the prize in the prize storage means.

If it is such a structure, in the main control means, the value of the random number acquired by the fourth random number acquisition means and the predetermined value have a predetermined relationship as a result of the comparison by the fourth special prize determination means by the notice effect means. In this case, a command including winning information stored in the second winning storage means is transmitted to the display control means.

In the display control means, when the command is received by the command receiving means, the notice display means performs a notice display at a display position corresponding to the prize storage information in the second prize storage means based on the received command.

As a result, the display means displays the display position corresponding to the winning storage information of the second winning storage means as an effect of notifying the game state that occurs when the subsequent change display of the current change display of the identification information is completed. An advance notice can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the player can grasp which winning prize to the second winning opening becomes the special prize state only by looking at the notice display on the display means.

Here, the main control means corresponds to the main control apparatus 162 in the first embodiment, the display control means corresponds to the display control apparatus 302, the command receiving means corresponds to step S1300, and the notice display means. Corresponds to steps S1602 to S1606, S2104.

[Invention A20] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A20 is the gaming machine of Invention A19,
A hold storage information storage means for storing the winning storage information of the second winning storage means in the storage means as the hold storage information;
Further comprising a hold storage information reading means for reading the hold storage information from the storage means;
The process constituting the second winning storage means and the process constituting the hold storage information storage means are executed as one of the predetermined cycle process and the interrupted process, and the process constituting the hold storage information reading means and the process The process constituting the notice effect means is executed as the other of the predetermined cycle process and the interrupted process,
The notice effect means transmits a command including the hold storage information read by the hold storage information reading means.

When one of the process constituting the second prize storage means and the process constituting the notice effect means is executed separately as the predetermined cycle process and the other as the interrupted process, the process is performed between the predetermined cycle process and the interrupted process. Since it is necessary to transfer the winning storage information of the two winning storage means, the winning storage information of the second winning storage means is temporarily stored in the storage means. At this time, with respect to the storage information of the winning of the second winning storage means, it is necessary to display a notice at the display position corresponding to the stored information, so the winning storage information of the second winning storage means and the storage means hold The stored information must be the same value. This is because when the two pieces of stored information are different, for example, there is a possibility that a notice will be displayed at a position where the notice should not be displayed. However, for example, if the processing constituting the second prize storage means is executed as a predetermined cycle processing and the processing constituting the hold storage information storage means is executed separately as interrupted processing, both pieces of stored information may be different depending on the timing. is there.

If it is such composition, processing which constitutes the 2nd prize storage part and processing which constitutes reservation storage information storage part are performed as one of predetermined cycle processing and interruption processing.

Thereby, the effect that the possibility that the storage information of the winning of the second winning storage means and the reserved storage information of the storage means may be reduced can be reduced.

Here, the hold storage information storage means corresponds to step S364 in the first embodiment, and the hold storage information reading means corresponds to step S852.

[Invention A21] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A21 is the gaming machine of Invention A20,
A second winning determination means for determining a winning in the second winning opening;
The processing constituting the second winning determination means, the processing constituting the second winning storage means, and the processing constituting the reserved storage information storage means are executed as the predetermined cycle processing.

If it is such composition, processing which constitutes the 2nd prize judging means, processing which constitutes the 2nd prize storage means, and processing which constitutes reservation storage information storage means are performed as predetermined cycle processing.

Thereby, even if the processing load of the interrupted process and other processes increases depending on the content of the game, it is possible to obtain an effect that the winning to the second winning opening can be determined at a regular timing.
Further, it is possible to obtain an effect that the winning can be stored at the winning timing to the second winning opening and the stored storage information can be stored in the storage means.

Here, the second winning determination means corresponds to step S350 in the first embodiment.

[Invention A22] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A22 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A20 and A21.
Between the processing that constitutes the on-hold storage information storage means and the processing that constitutes the on-hold storage information reading means, the on-hold storage information in the storage means matches the winning storage information in the second prize storage means. The storage unit further includes a storage unit for updating storage information that updates storage information stored in the storage unit.

With such a configuration, a process is executed in which the winning storage information of the second winning storage means is changed between the process constituting the hold storage information storage means and the process constituting the hold storage information reading means. In addition, the hold storage information update unit updates the hold storage information in the storage unit so that the hold storage information in the storage unit matches the winning storage information in the second winning storage unit.

Thereby, the effect that the possibility that the storage information of the winning prize in the second winning storage means and the reserved storage information in the storage means may be further reduced can be obtained.

Here, the pending storage information updating unit is configured to perform steps S608 and S6 in the first embodiment.
10 is supported.

[Invention A23] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A23 is the gaming machine of Invention A22,
A second prize storage information updating means for updating the prize storage information of the second prize storage means when the prize display is stored in the second prize storage means when the change display is completed by the change display means; In addition,
When the second prize storage information update means updates the prize storage information of the second prize storage means by the second prize storage information update means, the reservation storage information of the storage means has a degree corresponding to the degree of the update. It is characterized by updating.

With such a configuration, when the change display unit finishes displaying the change and the second prize storage unit stores a winning combination, the second winning storage information update unit stores the winning combination in the second winning storage unit. Even if the stored information is updated, the pending storage information updating means updates the pending storage information in the storage means to a degree corresponding to the degree of the update.

Thereby, the effect that the possibility that the storage information of the winning prize in the second winning storage means and the reserved storage information in the storage means may be further reduced can be obtained.

Here, the hold storage information update means may update the hold storage information of the storage means before the update by the second prize storage information update means, or after the update by the second prize storage information update means. The on-hold storage information may be updated.

Further, the second winning memory information update means corresponds to step S606 in the first embodiment.

[Invention A24] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A24 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A20 to A23,
First random number storage means for storing the random number acquired by the third random number acquisition means in a first area of the storage means;
A second random number storage means for storing the random number acquired by the fourth random number acquisition means in a second area different from the first area of the storage means;
The third special prize determination unit performs the special prize determination by comparing the random value stored in the first area of the storage unit with the predetermined value,
The fourth special prize determination unit performs the special prize determination by comparing the random value stored in the second area of the storage unit with the predetermined value.

When the winning storage information of the second winning storage means and the hold storage information of the storage means differ depending on the timing, the random numbers acquired by the third random number acquisition means or the fourth random number acquisition means are stored in the same area. Then, the random number value used in the third special prize determination means is different from the random number value acquired in the third random number acquisition means, or the random number value used in the fourth special prize determination means is acquired in the fourth random number acquisition means. It may be different from the random value.

In such a configuration, the first random number storage means stores the random number acquired by the third random number acquisition means in the first area of the storage means, and the third special prize determination means stores the random number acquired in the first area of the storage means. The special prize is determined by comparing the stored random number value with a predetermined value. Further, the random number acquired by the fourth random number acquisition means is stored in the second area of the storage means by the second random number storage means, and the value of the random number stored in the second area of the storage means by the fourth special prize determination means. And the predetermined value is compared with a predetermined value. Therefore, the random number acquired by the third random number acquisition unit and the random number acquired by the fourth random number acquisition unit are stored in different areas of the storage unit.

Thereby, the value of the random number used in the third special prize determination unit is different from the value of the random number acquired in the third random number acquisition unit, or the value of the random number used in the fourth special prize determination unit is acquired by the fourth random number acquisition unit. The effect that the possibility of being different from the value of the random number can be reduced is obtained.

Here, the first random number storage means corresponds to step S356 in the first embodiment,
The second random number storage means corresponds to step S362.

[Invention A25] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A25 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions A19 to A24.
While executing the processing constituting the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, or the notice effect means, the multiple processing execution prohibition prohibiting the execution of the processing for the next winning to the second winning opening. Means,
Second winning detection means for detecting a winning at the second winning opening;
Second detection result acquisition means for acquiring the detection result of the second winning detection means for each execution of the predetermined cycle process;
A second winning determination unit that executes the predetermined cycle processing a plurality of times and determines a winning to the second winning port based on a detection result acquired by the second detection result acquisition unit;
The process constituting the second winning determination means is executed as the predetermined period process.

When a predetermined cycle process is executed when a winning is made at the second winning opening, the second winning determining means determines the winning at the second winning opening, so the fourth random number obtaining means, the fourth special prize Execution of the processing that constitutes the judging means or the notice effect means is started, but at that point,
If the process constituting the fourth random number obtaining unit, the fourth special prize determining unit, or the notice effect unit is being executed, the multiple process execution prohibiting unit prohibits the execution of the process. Then, since the command is not transmitted to the display control means for the next winning to the second winning opening, there is a possibility that the display means does not display the storage information of the winning prize in the second winning storage means.

With such a configuration, when there is a winning at the second winning opening, the winning at the second winning opening is detected by the second winning detecting means. This detection result is obtained by the second detection result acquisition means.
It is acquired every time the predetermined periodic process is executed. Then, the second winning determination means determines the winning to the second winning opening based on the detection result obtained by executing the predetermined cycle process a plurality of times. That is, in order for the second winning determination means to determine winning in the second winning opening, it is necessary to execute the predetermined cycle process a plurality of times.

Accordingly, since it is unlikely that the predetermined cycle process is executed a plurality of times during the execution of the process constituting the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, or the notice effect means, the next prize winning to the second prize opening The execution of the processing constituting the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, or the notice effect means is not prohibited, and the possibility that the stored information of the winning prize storage means is not displayed is reduced. The effect that it can do is acquired.

Here, the multiple processing execution prohibiting means is the steps S358 and S8 in the first embodiment.
50, the second winning detection means corresponds to the start winning opening sensor 154b, the second detection result acquisition means corresponds to step S200, and the second winning determination means corresponds to step S350.

[Invention A26] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A26 is any one of Inventions A2 to A25.
In this game machine,
In the first special prize determination unit and the second special prize determination unit, a probability variation state generation unit configured to generate a probability variation state in which the random number value is compared with the plurality of different predetermined values, respectively.
When the probability variation state has occurred, a process constituting a part of the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, and the notice effect production means is executed as the predetermined period process, and the second
The process constituting the remainder of the random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, and the notice effect means is executed as the interrupted process.

In the probability variation state, since the first special prize determination unit and the second special prize determination unit respectively compare the random number value and a plurality of different predetermined values, the number of comparisons is larger than that in the non-probability variation state.
Processing load increases.

With such a configuration, when the probability variation state has occurred, the processing constituting a part of the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, and the notice effect means is executed as the predetermined period processing, The process constituting the remainder of the random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, and the notice effect means is executed as the interrupted process.

As a result, when the probability variation state occurs, the processing is distributed to the predetermined cycle processing and the interrupted processing, so that the possibility that the predetermined cycle processing does not end within the predetermined cycle can be reduced. The effect is obtained. In other cases, since the processing is not distributed to the predetermined periodic processing and the interrupted processing, the possibility of processing delay is reduced, and an argument is passed between the predetermined periodic processing and the interrupted processing. The effect that the possibility that the malfunction resulting from generating will arise can be reduced is acquired.

[Invention A27] Further, the gaming machine of Invention A27 is any one of Inventions A2 to A25.
In this game machine,
In the third special prize determination unit and the fourth special prize determination unit, further includes a probability variation state generation unit that generates a probability variation state in which the random number value is compared with a plurality of different predetermined values, respectively.
When the probability variation state has occurred, a process constituting a part of the fourth random number acquisition unit, the fourth special prize determination unit, and the notice effect unit is executed as the predetermined cycle process, and the fourth
The processing constituting the remainder of the random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, and the notice effect production means is executed as the interrupted process.

In the probability variation state, the third special prize determination unit and the fourth special prize determination unit respectively compare the random number value and a plurality of different predetermined values, so the number of comparisons is larger than in the non-probability variation state,
Processing load increases.

With such a configuration, when the probability variation state has occurred, the processing constituting a part of the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, and the notice effect means is executed as the predetermined period processing. The process constituting the remainder of the random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, and the notice effect means is executed as the interrupted process.

As a result, when the probability variation state occurs, the processing is distributed to the predetermined cycle processing and the interrupted processing, so that the possibility that the predetermined cycle processing does not end within the predetermined cycle can be reduced. The effect is obtained. In other cases, since the processing is not distributed to the predetermined periodic processing and the interrupted processing, the possibility of processing delay is reduced, and an argument is passed between the predetermined periodic processing and the interrupted processing. The effect that the possibility that the malfunction resulting from generating will arise can be reduced is acquired.

[Invention A28] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A28 is any one of Inventions A2 to A27.
In this game machine,
When the change display means finishes the change display, and the first prize storage means stores a prize, the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, and a part of the notice effect means A process to be configured is executed as the predetermined period process, and a process constituting the remaining part of the second random number acquisition unit, the second special prize determination unit, and the notice effect unit is executed as the interrupted process.

When the change display means finishes the change display, if the first prize storage means stores the winning prize, the first special prize judging means performs the special prize determination, so the processing load increases.

In such a configuration, when the change display is completed by the change display means and the first prize storage means stores the winning, the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, and the notice effect means. A part of the process is executed as a predetermined period process, and the process constituting the remaining part of the second random number acquisition unit, the second special prize determination unit, and the notice effect unit is executed as an interrupted process.

As a result, when the change display unit finishes displaying the change and the first prize storage unit stores the winning combination, the processing is distributed to the predetermined period process and the interrupted process. The effect that the possibility that the problem that it does not end within will occur can be reduced. In other cases, since the processing is not distributed to the predetermined periodic processing and the interrupted processing, the possibility of processing delay is reduced, and an argument is passed between the predetermined periodic processing and the interrupted processing. The effect that the possibility that the malfunction resulting from generating will arise can be reduced is acquired.

[Invention A29] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A29 is any one of Inventions A2 to A27.
In this game machine,
When the change display is completed by the change display means and the second prize storage means stores a prize, the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means and a part of the notice effect means are A process to be configured is executed as the predetermined period process, and a process constituting the remaining part of the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, and the notice effect means is executed as the interrupted process.

When the change display unit finishes displaying the change and the second prize storage unit stores the winning combination, the third special prize determining unit performs the special determination, so the processing load increases.

With such a configuration, when the change display means finishes the change display and the second prize storage means stores the winning, the fourth random number obtaining means, the fourth special prize determining means, and the notice effect means. A part of the process is executed as a predetermined periodic process, and the part of the fourth random number obtaining unit, the fourth special prize determining unit, and the remaining part of the notice effect unit is executed as an interrupted process.

As a result, when the change display means finishes displaying the change and the second prize storage means stores the winning, the processing is distributed to the predetermined cycle processing and the interrupted processing. The effect that the possibility that the problem that it does not end within will occur can be reduced. In other cases, since the processing is not distributed to the predetermined periodic processing and the interrupted processing, the possibility of processing delay is reduced, and an argument is passed between the predetermined periodic processing and the interrupted processing. The effect that the possibility that the malfunction resulting from generating will arise can be reduced is acquired.

[Invention A30] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A30 is any one of Inventions A2 to A29.
In this game machine,
A process that constitutes a part of the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, and the notice effect means when there is a prize at the first prize opening and a prize at the second prize opening; It is executed as a predetermined cycle process, and the process constituting the remaining part of the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means and the notice effect means is executed as the interrupted process.

When there is a prize at the first prize opening and a prize at the second prize opening, the special prize judgment is performed by the second special prize judgment means and the fourth special prize judgment means, so the processing load increases.

With such a configuration, when there is a winning at the first winning port and a winning at the second winning port, a part of the second random number obtaining means, the second special prize determining means, and the notice effect means are configured. The process is executed as a predetermined period process, and the process constituting the remaining part of the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, and the notice effect means is executed as an interrupted process.

As a result, when there is a winning at the first winning opening and a winning at the second winning opening, the processing is distributed to the predetermined cycle processing and the interrupted processing, so that the predetermined cycle processing does not end within the predetermined cycle. The effect that the possibility that a malfunction will occur can be reduced. In other cases, since the processing is not distributed to the predetermined periodic processing and the interrupted processing, the possibility of processing delay is reduced, and an argument is passed between the predetermined periodic processing and the interrupted processing. The effect that the possibility that the malfunction resulting from generating will arise can be reduced is acquired.

[Invention A31] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A31 is any one of Inventions A2 to A29.
In this game machine,
The process constituting a part of the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, and the notice effect means when there is a prize at the first prize opening and a prize at the second prize opening. It is executed as a predetermined cycle process, and the process constituting the remaining part of the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means and the notice effect means is executed as the interrupted process.

When there is a prize at the first prize opening and a prize at the second prize opening, the special prize judgment is performed by the second special prize judgment means and the fourth special prize judgment means, so the processing load increases.

With such a configuration, when there is a winning at the first winning port and a winning at the second winning port, a part of the fourth random number obtaining means, the fourth special prize determining means, and the notice effect means are configured. The process is executed as a predetermined cycle process, and the process constituting the remaining part of the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, and the notice effect means is executed as an interrupted process.

As a result, when there is a winning at the first winning opening and a winning at the second winning opening, the processing is distributed to the predetermined cycle processing and the interrupted processing, so that the predetermined cycle processing does not end within the predetermined cycle. The effect that the possibility that a malfunction will occur can be reduced. In other cases, since the processing is not distributed to the predetermined periodic processing and the interrupted processing, the possibility of processing delay is reduced, and an argument is passed between the predetermined periodic processing and the interrupted processing. The effect that the possibility that the malfunction resulting from generating will arise can be reduced is acquired.

[Invention A32] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A32 is any one of Inventions A2 to A31.
In this game machine,
Further comprising main control means for performing main control of the game, and display control means for performing display control of the display means by control of the main control means,
The main control means includes
Comprising the notice effect means,
The notice effect changing means changes the identification information when the value of the random number acquired by the second random number acquiring means and the predetermined value are in a predetermined relationship as a result of the comparison by the second special prize determining means. Sending a command including time information relating to the display time to the display control means;
The display control means includes
Command receiving means for receiving the command;
Mission time calculation means for calculating a mission time from a predetermined reference time until notification of confirmation of the special prize state based on a command received by the command reception means;
Mission display means for displaying a predetermined mission together with the mission time calculated by the mission time calculation means.

If it is such a structure, in the main control means, the value of the random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means and the predetermined value have a predetermined relationship as a result of the comparison by the second special prize determination means by the notice effect means. In this case, a command including time information related to the display time for changing the identification information is transmitted to the display control means.

In the display control means, when the command is received by the command receiving means, the mission time calculation means calculates the mission time from the predetermined reference time until notification of the confirmation of the special prize state based on the received command. Then, the mission display means displays a predetermined mission together with the calculated mission time.

As a result, the player is enthusiastic about the game in order to achieve the mission contents within the given mission time, and then a special prize state is generated, so that an effect of improving the game taste can be obtained.

Here, the main control means corresponds to the main control apparatus 162 in the seventh embodiment, the display control means corresponds to the display control apparatus 302, the time information corresponds to the variation pattern, and the command receiving means Corresponding to step S1300, the mission time calculation means includes step S16.
Corresponding to 08, S2128, and S2130, the mission display means corresponds to step S2132.

[Invention A33] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention A33 is any one of Inventions A2 to A31.
In this game machine,
Further comprising main control means for performing main control of the game, and display control means for performing display control of the display means by control of the main control means,
The main control means includes
Comprising the notice effect means,
The notice effect means changes the identification information when the value of the random number acquired by the fourth random number acquisition means and the predetermined value are in a predetermined relationship as a result of the comparison by the fourth special prize determination means. Sending a command including time information relating to the display time to the display control means;
The display control means includes
Command receiving means for receiving the command;
Mission time calculation means for calculating a mission time from a predetermined reference time until notification of confirmation of the special prize state based on a command received by the command reception means;
Mission display means for displaying a predetermined mission together with the mission time calculated by the mission time calculation means.

If it is such a structure, in the main control means, the value of the random number acquired by the fourth random number acquisition means and the predetermined value have a predetermined relationship as a result of the comparison by the fourth special prize determination means by the notice effect means. In this case, a command including time information related to the display time for changing the identification information is transmitted to the display control means.

In the display control means, when the command is received by the command receiving means, the mission time calculation means calculates the mission time from the predetermined reference time until notification of the confirmation of the special prize state based on the received command. Then, the mission display means displays a predetermined mission together with the calculated mission time.

As a result, the player is enthusiastic about the game in order to achieve the mission contents within the given mission time, and then a special prize state is generated, so that an effect of improving the game taste can be obtained.

Here, the main control means corresponds to the main control apparatus 162 in the seventh embodiment, the display control means corresponds to the display control apparatus 302, the time information corresponds to the variation pattern, and the command receiving means Corresponding to step S1300, the mission time calculation means includes step S16.
Corresponding to 08, S2128, and S2130, the mission display means corresponds to step S2132.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 11 ... Outer frame, 12 ... Main part of game machine, 13 ... Main body frame, 14 ... Front door frame, 15 ... Back pack unit, 21 ... Window part, 22 ... Glass, 23 ... Annular lighting part,
24 ... Error display lamp unit, 25 ... Prize ball lamp unit, 26 ... Speaker unit, 31 ... Upper bulge unit, 32 ... Lower bulge unit, 33 ... Upper plate, 34 ... Lower plate, 35 ... Operation buttons,
36 ... Ball lending operation device, 37 ... Ball lending button, 38 ... Return button, 39 ... Frequency display section, 41 ... Game ball launch handle, 81 ... Game board, 81a ... Base board, 82 ... General winning opening, 83 ... Variable Prize-winning device, 83a ... Big prize opening, 84a, 84b ... Starting prize opening,
85 ... Thru gate, 86 ... Variable display unit, 87 ... Out port, 88 ... Nail, 9
1 ... Production symbol display device, 92 ... Center frame, 93 ... Special symbol display device, 93
a ... LED
93b, 242a ... 7-segment display, 94 ... Normal symbol display device, 94a, 502
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS Display unit, 95a, 95b, 96 ... Holding lamp, 101 ... Inner rail, 102 ... Outer rail, 103 ... Arc member, 104 ... Return ball prevention member, 105 ... Return rubber, 110
... Game ball launching device, 143 ... Audio lamp control device, 241 ... Mounting base, 244, 24
6 ... Substrate box, 152a, 152b, 152c ... Winning mouth sensor, 153 ... Count sensor, 154a, 154b ... Start winning mouth sensor, 155 ... Gate sensor, 16
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 2 ... Main controller, 201 ... Back pack, 202 ... Discharge mechanism part, 204 ... Control apparatus assembly unit, 211 ... Base part, 212 ... Protection cover part, 213 ... External terminal board, 2
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 14 ... Latching pin, 215 ... Fastener, 217 ... Main body frame open switch, 221 ... Tank, 222 ... Tank rail 223 ... Case rail, 223a ... No ball detection sensor, 223b ... Ball release switch,
224 ... Dispensing device, 225 ... Game ball distribution unit, 229 ... Back pack substrate, 229a ... Power switch, 242 ... Dispensing control device, 243 ... Power supply and launch control device, 243a
Power supply unit 243b Launch control unit 243c Power failure monitoring circuit 243d RAM erase switch circuit 245 State recovery switch 247 RAM erase switch 24
9 ... Ball lending connection terminal plate, 258 ... Dispensing ball detection sensor, 300 ... Control system, 302 ... Display control device, 310, 350, 370 ... MPU, 312, 352 ... ROM, 314
354, RAM, 316, 356, 380, input port, 318, 358, 388
... Output port, 320, 360, 382, 390 ... Bus, 362 ... Audio output device 364 ... Lamp display device, 372 ... Program ROM, 374 ... Work RAM, 3
76: Image controller, 378: DMAC, 384: Character ROM, 386
... Video RAM, 404, 408 ... Distribution structure table, 406 ... Fluctuation pattern table, 410 ... Production data table, 412 ... Stop symbol management table, 414 ... Stop symbol table, C1 ... Jackpot random number counter, C2 ... Jackpot type random number counter ,
C3 ... Reach random number counter, C4 ... Normal lottery random number counter, CINI1 ... First initial value random number counter, CINI2 ... Second initial value random number counter, CS ... Fluctuation pattern random number counter, CS1 ... Fluctuation type counter, CS2 ... Fluctuation type counter, CS3: Variation type counter, Dm: Main display area, Ds: Sub display area, Ds1: Notice area, Ds2 ...
Notice area, H ... Card insertion slot, K1, K2 ... Adhesion space, L1 ... Effective line,
Rm1, Rm2, Rm3, Rm4 ... reserved ball symbol, Rms ... predetermined notice symbol, Y ... ball lending device, Z1 ... left symbol column, Z2 ... middle symbol column, Z3 ... right symbol column

Claims (2)

When a special prize determination for generating a special prize state is made triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and the special prize state is determined to be generated based on the result of the special prize determination. A game machine that displays the identification information in a stopped state and generates the special prize state,
Change display means for changing and displaying the identification information on the display means;
If the predetermined condition is established when the change display means is displaying the change, the condition establishment storage means for storing the establishment of the predetermined condition;
A first special prize determining means for performing the special prize determination when the change establishment means stores the establishment of the predetermined condition when the change display is completed;
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, a second special prize determining means for performing the special prize determination;
A special prize state generating means for generating the special prize state based on a determination result of the first special prize determination means;
Based on the determination result of the second special prize determining means, and a notice effect means for performing an effect of giving a notice about the gaming state that occurs when the change display subsequent to the current change display of the identification information is completed,
A process constituting part or all of the second special prize determining means and the notice effect means is executed as an interrupted process that is interrupted during execution of a predetermined period process executed at a predetermined period. Machine. The special prize determination for generating the special prize state is triggered by winning the first prize opening or the second prize opening, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means, and the special prize state is generated based on the result of the special prize judgment If it is determined to be a gaming machine that stops displaying the identification information with a predetermined content and generates the special prize state,
Change display means for changing and displaying the identification information on the display means;
A first random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number when there is a winning in the first winning opening;
A second random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number when there is a winning in the first winning opening;
If there is a winning in the first winning opening when the change display means is changed and displayed,
First prize storage means for storing the prize;
When the change display is completed by the change display means and the first prize storage means stores a prize, the random number value obtained at the time of the prize winning by the first random number obtaining means and a predetermined value are obtained. First special prize determination means for performing the special prize determination by comparing;
Second prize determination for performing the prize determination by comparing the predetermined value with the value of the random number acquired at the time of the winning by the second random number acquisition means when there is a winning in the first winning opening Means,
A third random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number when there is a winning in the second winning opening;
A fourth random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number when there is a winning in the second winning opening;
When there is a winning in the second winning opening when the change display means is displaying the change,
Second prize storage means for storing the prize;
When the second display storage means stores a prize when the change display is finished by the change display means, the random number value acquired at the time of the winning by the third random number acquisition means and a predetermined value are obtained. Third special prize determination means for performing the special prize determination by comparing;
When there is a prize winning in the second prize opening, a fourth special prize determination for performing the special prize determination by comparing the predetermined random value with the random number value acquired at the time of the winning by the fourth random number acquisition means Means,
A special prize state generating means for generating the special prize state based on a determination result of the first special prize determination means or the third special prize determination means;
Based on the determination result of the second special prize determination means or the fourth special prize determination means, a notice for performing an effect for giving a notice about the gaming state that occurs when the subsequent change display after the current change display of the identification information ends. Directing means,
The processes constituting part or all of the second random number acquisition means, the second special prize determination means, the fourth random number acquisition means, the fourth special prize determination means, and the notice effect means are predetermined cycles that are executed in a predetermined cycle. A gaming machine that is executed as an interrupted process that is interrupted during execution of a periodic process.

Images